JP2006304903A - Slot machine using game ball - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine using game balls capable of preventing a fraudulent program from being resident in an unused area of a storage means of a microcomputer controlling a game, executing a power recovery process as early as possible without producing multiple interruption, surely executing the power restoration process by a sub-control means and, when erroneously detecting a power cut, preventing the erroneous execution of the power recovery process. <P>SOLUTION: A CPU 41a initializes an unused area and an unused stack area of a RAM 41c for every one game. When executing either one of a power cut interruption process or a timer interruption process, the CPU prohibits the interruption of the other interruption process, when the interruption timing of the power cut interruption process coincides with the interruption timing of the timer interruption process, preferentially executes the power cut interruption process and, when a power lowering signal is input during the execution of the timer interruption process, waits the finish of the timer interruption process and executes the power cut interruption process. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable, and in particular, setting a bet number using a game ball The present invention relates to a slot machine using a game ball capable of playing a game.

  Conventionally, as this type of slot machine, every time one game is finished, data that does not need to be carried over to the next game among the stored data in the RAM mounted on the microcomputer that controls the game (for example, the next game) It has been proposed to initialize a winning game winning flag that is not carried over, the number of medals inserted, etc., and to shift to the next game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  Also in the pachinko machine, the variable display device that controls the variable display device has a storage area for storing data corresponding to each display area constituting the variable display device, and at the end of the variable display (from the game control means) It has been proposed to initialize the data stored in the storage area described above (when a confirmation command is received) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

  On the other hand, in this type of slot machine, the control of the game (game) and the control of the effect performed in connection with the game are performed by one control means (microcomputer). There is a certain limit to the processing capacity, and it is extremely difficult to diversify the game and the accompanying effects, so a sub-control means is provided separately from the main control means for controlling the game. There has been proposed a slot machine in which the sub-control means controls the effects related to the game based on the command transmitted from the main control means.

  Also, the contents of the RAM provided in the main control means and the contents of the RAM provided in the sub-control means, that is, the control contents of the main control means and the sub-control means are backed up even in the event of a power failure. A slot machine that can return to the state has been proposed. This type of slot machine is provided with a power interruption detection means for monitoring a supply voltage and detecting a power interruption. When a power interruption is detected by this power interruption detection means, the main control means and sub Execute power failure processing to set data (for example, parity, checksum, etc.) to determine whether the control contents of the control means are backed up normally, and control the main control means and sub-control means at the time of recovery There has been proposed one that can confirm whether or not the content backup is normal (see, for example, Patent Document 3).

  In addition, the power interruption detection means as described above sometimes picks up noise or the like and erroneously detects a power interruption. In this case, the control means is in a stopped state even though the power interruption has not occurred. This will cause a malfunction. For this reason, after executing the power failure processing, a power failure detection signal from the power failure detection means is monitored, and when the power failure detection signal is not input, the original control state is restored. (For example, see Patent Document 4).

JP 2001-79157 A JP 2002-35318 A JP 2001-87459 A Published practical use Heisei 4-67733 gazette

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1 described above, every time one game is completed, data stored in the RAM that is not required to be carried over to the next game is initialized. A storage area in use (a storage area that is not used at all by design or an unused area in a stack) is not periodically initialized. For this reason, by making an illegal program resident in these unused areas of the RAM, the original program (stored in the ROM) at some opportunity (for example, an operation is performed with a procedure that is unlikely to be performed normally). There is a risk of fraud such as causing the gaming machine to perform an operation different from that of the program.

  On the other hand, in a slot machine generally described in Patent Document 3, a plurality of basic processes that constitute game control (for example, BET process, lottery process, reel rotation process, reel stop process, winning determination process, etc.) Are executed step by step, and interrupt processing for detecting switches, counting time, sending commands, etc. is interrupted in the basic processing described above and executed periodically. From such a configuration, it is conceivable that the power failure processing is interrupted by other processing by NMI (interrupt that cannot be prohibited) at the time of power failure. However, in this case, the power outage process can be performed promptly after the occurrence of the power outage, but if a power outage occurs during the above-mentioned periodic interrupt processing, double interruptions occur. There is a risk that not only the control load increases but also the consistency of control cannot be achieved. As a method for performing power failure processing without performing double interrupts, for example, it is conceivable to perform power failure processing during regularly executed interrupt processing, but in this case, interrupting after the occurrence of power failure Since the power failure process is not performed until the process is executed, there is a possibility that a necessary power source cannot be secured until the power failure process is performed, and there is a problem that the power failure process cannot be surely performed.

  In addition, as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 3, when both the main control means and the sub control means execute power outage processing at the time of a power outage, the main control means and the sub control means individually detect the power outage. It is necessary to detect a power failure based on control information from the main control means. However, although the power failure can be reliably detected on the sub-control means side in the former, it is necessary to provide voltage monitoring means on both the main control means and the sub-control means, so that the production cost increases. In some cases, when control information from the main control means cannot be received normally, the power failure processing by the sub control means is not performed and backup cannot be performed normally.

  In the technique described in Patent Document 4, the power failure detection signal from the power failure detection means is monitored after the power failure process is executed, and if the power failure detection signal is not input, the original control state is restored. Therefore, even if the power interruption detection means picks up noise etc. and detects power interruption accidentally, it can return to the original control state, but even if it detects power interruption accidentally, power interruption processing As a result, the control is interrupted for a longer time than necessary, and there is a problem that an excessive load is applied.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and can prevent illegal programs from staying in the unused area of the memory means of the microcomputer that controls the game and generate multiple interrupts. The power failure processing can be performed at the earliest possible stage without failing, the power failure processing of the sub-control means can be performed reliably, and when the power interruption is detected by mistake, the power failure processing is erroneously performed. It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine using a game ball that can prevent such a situation.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 1 of the present invention,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified;
A take-in device for taking in a player-owned game ball;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to perform an take-in operation for taking in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and one game is ended by deriving the display result of the variable display device. A slot machine using a game ball that can be awarded according to the display result of the variable display device,
A main control board, which is composed of a microcomputer having an interrupt input terminal that generates an external interrupt when a signal is input, and a normal input terminal, and on which main control means for controlling a game is mounted;
A sub control board equipped with sub control means for controlling the production based on reception of control information transmitted from the main control means;
Power interruption detection means for monitoring a state of predetermined power used in the slot machine using the game ball and outputting a power interruption signal when a power interruption condition related to the interruption of power supply is established; ,
A relay board for communicably connecting the main control board and the sub control board;
With
The power interruption detection means outputs the power interruption signal to both the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal of the microcomputer,
The main control means includes
A storage means for storing data in a readable and writable manner and capable of holding data stored in the storage area even when power supply is stopped; A work area in which data for operating the microcomputer constituting the means is stored, and an unused area in which data for operating the microcomputer constituting the main control means is not read or written And main data storage means assigned at least,
Initialization means for initializing at least a part of the storage area in the main data storage means;
Main control state return processing means for executing main control state return processing for returning the control state of the main control means based on data stored in the main data storage means when the main control means is activated;
Timer interrupt processing execution means for interrupting a process being executed every predetermined unit time and executing a timer interrupt process;
A plurality of types of processing executed in the timer interrupt processing, including processing for monitoring the input state of the operation detecting means for detecting the player's operation and storing the input information indicating the input state in the main data storage means A process selecting means for selecting the timer interrupt process according to the number of executions,
Upon power interruption including power interruption processing for enabling the main control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the main control means upon activation of the main control means in response to the occurrence of the external interrupt Interruption processing execution means for executing interruption processing;
Multiple interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the other interrupt process during the execution of either the timer interrupt process or the power interruption interrupt process,
The input information stored in the timer interrupt process is read, and a basic process for controlling one game is executed by gradually shifting a plurality of control states according to the progress of the game based on the read input information. Basic processing execution means to
Control information generating means for generating the control information according to the progress of the game in the basic processing;
Control information transmitting means for transmitting control information generated by the control information generating means to the sub-control means by processing executed in the timer interrupt processing;
Including
The sub-control means includes
Sub-data storage means capable of storing data for operation by the sub-control means so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding stored data even when power supply is stopped;
Sub-control state return processing means for executing sub-control state return processing for returning the control state of the sub-control means based on data stored in the sub-data storage means when the sub-control means is activated;
Periodic process execution means for executing a periodic process including a process for allowing the sub-control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the sub-control means when the sub-control means is activated. When,
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused area in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game,
The interruption processing execution means at the time of power interruption
When the external interrupt occurs simultaneously with the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption accompanying the generation of the external interrupt is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process,
When the external interrupt occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption is executed after the timer interrupt process being executed is completed,
In the interruption process at the time of power interruption, when the normal input terminal is monitored, it is determined whether the power interruption signal is input, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal The power interruption process is executed, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the interruption process is performed without performing the power interruption process.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the unused area in the main data storage means is initialized for each game, even if the unauthorized program is stored using the unused area in the main data storage means, the unauthorized program remains resident. Can be prevented.
In addition, the main control board and the sub control board are communicably connected via the relay board, and the sub control board is not directly connected to the main control board. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the outside and affecting the control of the game.
In addition, the interruption of the other interrupt process is prohibited during the execution of either the interrupt process during power interruption or the timer interrupt process. Even when the error is detected, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of double interruptions, thereby preventing an increase in the control load of the main control means and loss of data consistency. In particular, the transmission can be normally completed before the main control means stops without causing an external interruption due to the detection of the power interruption signal during the transmission of the control information and thereby preventing the transmission of the control information. In addition, when the interruption timing of power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of timer interruption processing are simultaneous, the interruption interruption processing is prioritized and executed. When an interruption signal is detected during execution, the interruption interruption process is executed after the timer interruption process is completed, and it is as fast as possible while preventing multiple interruptions. Since the power interruption process is performed in stages, the power interruption process can be reliably performed before the main control means stops.
In addition, a process (power failure process) is performed periodically so that the control state of the sub-control means can be normally returned to the control state before the power failure without depending on the control information from the main control means. Thus, it is possible to normally back up the control state of the sub-control means without causing the power failure process to be disabled due to the failure to normally receive the transmission of the control information indicating the power failure.
Also, power interruption interrupt processing is executed in response to an external interrupt due to the input of a power interruption signal to the interrupt input terminal. In power interruption interruption processing, power interruption processing (power failure processing) is performed. Before it is done, it is determined whether or not a power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal, and when it is determined that a power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal, power interruption processing is performed When it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the process returns to the original process. In other words, the power interruption signal is input to two terminals of the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal, and the interruption processing is executed when the power interruption signal is input to the interrupt input terminal. In addition, it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal before the power interruption processing is executed, and the power interruption processing is executed only when the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal. If the power interruption is detected by mistake, it is possible to prevent the power interruption processing from being performed. Can be prevented from being interrupted or being unnecessarily burdened.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the capture control means may be included in the main control means, or may be provided separately from the main control means. Further, it may be included in control means provided separately from the main control means, for example, payout control means for performing payout control of game balls.
Also, when the main control means is activated, the main control means is activated when power supply to the slot machine using the game ball is started (power-on), or there is a problem with the main control means ( This corresponds to the case where the main control means is restarted by the input of a reset signal accompanying the occurrence of a stoppage of the operation for a certain period of time or the like.
Also, when the sub-control means is activated, the sub-control means is activated when power supply to the slot machine using the game ball is started (power-on), or there is a problem with the sub-control means ( This corresponds to the case where the sub-control means is restarted by the input of a reset signal associated with the occurrence of an operation stop for a certain period of time or the like.
Further, the main data storage means may be built in the microcomputer constituting the main control means or may be provided outside the microcomputer.
The initialization unit may be any unit that initializes an unused area in the main data storage unit for each game (for example, at the start or end of a game, It is sufficient to initialize the unused area in the main data storage means at least once at the time of execution of a process that is always executed every time.
The initialization by the initialization means is, for example, a process of updating the target storage area value to 0 or updating it to a predetermined initial value.
In addition, the state of predetermined power used in the slot machine using the game ball is monitored, and when the power interruption condition related to the power supply being cut off is satisfied, for example, the DC voltage is monitored. , When the voltage falls below a predetermined threshold for judging power interruption, or when the period continues for a certain period, when the AC voltage is monitored and a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected, or Other conditions may be used as long as the period continues for a certain period of time, etc., as long as a power failure can be detected.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 2 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
A stack area capable of temporarily storing data in addition to the work area and the unused area is allocated to the storage area of the main data storage means,
The main control means includes
Data saving means for saving data in use by the microcomputer to the stack area;
Data restoration means for restoring data saved in the stack area by the saving means as data used by the microcomputer;
An unused stack area specifying means for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means in addition to the unused area in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the main data storage means, all the areas not currently used in the main data storage means Will be initialized for each game. For example, even if an attempt is made to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area, there is no room for the malicious program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal program from being resident more reliably. For example, by adding illegal data (such as an address specified by the illegal program) to the unused stack area, By rewriting the register etc. to an illegal one by malfunctioning, the original program Beam and can also prevent fraud that would to perform a different operation.

A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 3 of the present invention,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified;
A take-in device for taking in a player-owned game ball;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to perform an take-in operation for taking in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and one game is ended by deriving the display result of the variable display device. A slot machine using a game ball that can be awarded according to the display result of the variable display device,
A main control board, which is composed of a microcomputer having an interrupt input terminal that generates an external interrupt when a signal is input, and a normal input terminal, and on which main control means for controlling a game is mounted;
A sub control board equipped with sub control means for controlling the production based on reception of control information transmitted from the main control means;
Power interruption detection means for monitoring a state of predetermined power used in the slot machine using the game ball and outputting a power interruption signal when a power interruption condition related to the interruption of power supply is established; ,
A relay board for communicably connecting the main control board and the sub control board;
With
The power interruption detection means outputs the power interruption signal to both the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal of the microcomputer,
The main control means includes
A storage means for storing data in a readable and writable manner and capable of holding the data stored in the storage area even when power supply is stopped; and the main control as the storage area A main data storage means to which at least a work area in which data for operating a microcomputer constituting the means is stored and a stack area in which data can be temporarily stored are allocated;
Data saving means for saving data in use by the microcomputer to the stack area;
Data restoration means for restoring data saved in the stack area by the saving means as data used by the microcomputer;
An unused stack area specifying means for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Initialization means for initializing at least a part of the storage area in the main data storage means;
Main control state return processing means for executing main control state return processing for returning the control state of the main control means based on data stored in the main data storage means when the main control means is activated;
Timer interrupt process execution means for executing a timer interrupt process for interrupting and executing a process being executed every predetermined unit time; and
A plurality of types of processing executed in the timer interrupt processing, including processing for monitoring the input state of the operation detecting means for detecting the player's operation and storing the input information indicating the input state in the main data storage means A process selecting means for selecting the timer interrupt process according to the number of executions,
Upon power interruption including power interruption processing for enabling the main control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the main control means upon activation of the main control means in response to the occurrence of the external interrupt Interruption processing execution means for executing interruption processing;
Multiple interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the other interrupt process during the execution of either the timer interrupt process or the power interruption interrupt process,
The input information stored in the timer interrupt process is read, and a basic process for controlling one game is executed by gradually shifting a plurality of control states according to the progress of the game based on the read input information. Basic processing execution means to
Control information generating means for generating the control information according to the progress of the game in the basic processing;
Control information transmitting means for transmitting control information generated by the control information generating means to the sub-control means by processing executed in the timer interrupt processing;
Including
The sub-control means includes
Sub-data storage means capable of storing data for operation by the sub-control means so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding stored data even when power supply is stopped;
Sub-control state return processing means for executing sub-control state return processing for returning the control state of the sub-control means based on data stored in the sub-data storage means when the sub-control means is activated;
Periodic process execution means for executing a periodic process including a process for allowing the sub-control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the sub-control means when the sub-control means is activated. When,
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game,
The interruption processing execution means at the time of power interruption
When the external interrupt occurs simultaneously with the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption accompanying the generation of the external interrupt is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process,
When the external interrupt occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption is executed after the timer interrupt process being executed is completed,
In the interruption process at the time of power interruption, when the normal input terminal is monitored, it is determined whether the power interruption signal is input, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal The power interruption process is executed, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the interruption process is performed without performing the power interruption process.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the unused stack area in the stack area of the main data storage means is initialized for each game, even if the malicious program is stored using the unused stack area, the malicious program remains resident. For example, adding invalid data (such as an address specified by an illegal program) to an unused stack area and causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored makes the registers illegal. By rewriting, it is possible to prevent fraud that causes an operation different from the original program to be performed.
In addition, the main control board and the sub control board are communicably connected via the relay board, and the sub control board is not directly connected to the main control board. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the outside and affecting the control of the game.
In addition, the interruption of the other interrupt process is prohibited during the execution of either the interrupt process during power interruption or the timer interrupt process. Even when the error is detected, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of double interruptions, thereby preventing an increase in the control load of the main control means and loss of data consistency. In particular, the transmission can be normally completed before the main control means stops without causing an external interruption due to the detection of the power interruption signal during the transmission of the control information and thereby preventing the transmission of the control information. In addition, when the interruption timing of power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of timer interruption processing are simultaneous, the interruption interruption processing is prioritized and executed. When an interruption signal is detected during execution, the interruption interruption process is executed after the timer interruption process is completed, and it is as fast as possible while preventing multiple interruptions. Since the power interruption process is performed in stages, the power interruption process can be reliably performed before the main control means stops.
In addition, a process (power failure process) is performed periodically so that the control state of the sub-control means can be normally returned to the control state before the power failure without depending on the control information from the main control means. Thus, it is possible to normally back up the control state of the sub-control means without causing the power failure process to be disabled due to the failure to normally receive the transmission of the control information indicating the power failure.
Also, power interruption interrupt processing is executed in response to an external interrupt due to the input of a power interruption signal to the interrupt input terminal. In power interruption interruption processing, power interruption processing (power failure processing) is performed. Before it is done, it is determined whether or not a power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal, and when it is determined that a power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal, power interruption processing is performed When it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the process returns to the original process. In other words, the power interruption signal is input to two terminals of the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal, and the interruption processing is executed when the power interruption signal is input to the interrupt input terminal. In addition, it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal before the power interruption processing is executed, and the power interruption processing is executed only when the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal. If the power interruption is detected by mistake, it is possible to prevent the power interruption processing from being performed. Can be prevented from being interrupted or being unnecessarily burdened.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the capture control means may be included in the main control means, or may be provided separately from the main control means. Further, it may be included in control means provided separately from the main control means, for example, payout control means for performing payout control of game balls.
Also, when the main control means is activated, the main control means is activated when power supply to the slot machine using the game ball is started (power-on), or there is a problem with the main control means ( This corresponds to the case where the main control means is restarted by the input of a reset signal accompanying the occurrence of a stoppage of the operation for a certain period of time or the like.
Also, when the sub-control means is activated, the sub-control means is activated when power supply to the slot machine using the game ball is started (power-on), or there is a problem with the sub-control means ( This corresponds to the case where the sub-control means is restarted by the input of a reset signal associated with the occurrence of an operation stop for a certain period of time or the like.
Further, the main data storage means may be built in the microcomputer constituting the main control means or may be provided outside the microcomputer.
The initialization unit may be any unit that initializes an unused stack area of the stack area in the main data storage unit for each game (for example, at the start of a game) It is sufficient that the unused stack area is initialized at least once at the time of completion or at the end of the process that is always executed for each game.
The initialization by the initialization means is, for example, a process of updating the target storage area value to 0 or updating it to a predetermined initial value.
In addition, the state of predetermined power used in the slot machine using the game ball is monitored, and when the power interruption condition related to the power supply being cut off is satisfied, for example, the DC voltage is monitored. , When the voltage falls below a predetermined threshold for judging power interruption, or when the period continues for a certain period, when the AC voltage is monitored and a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected, or Other conditions may be used as long as the period continues for a certain period of time, etc., as long as a power failure can be detected.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The initialization means initializes an area defined in accordance with the type of initialization condition established when any one of a plurality of types of initialization conditions is established, and Regardless of the type of initialization condition, the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the storage area of the main data storage means must be initialized.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the unused area in the main data storage means and / or the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized regardless of which of the multiple types of initialization conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident.
Note that the multiple types of initialization conditions are those that are satisfied at any timing in one game (for example, at the start or end of the game, at the time of execution of a process that is always executed for each game). Is included.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 5 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4,
The main data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization means is set with an initialization start address in the main data storage means corresponding to two or more types of initialization conditions, and an initialization end address common to the initialization conditions is set. Including initialization area setting means, and when the initialization condition is satisfied, from the initialization start address set in the initialization area setting means corresponding to the type of the initialization condition to the initialization end address Initialize the storage area to which each address is assigned,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by setting only the initialization start address corresponding to two or more types of initialization conditions and the initialization end address common to these initialization conditions, it corresponds to the types of initialization conditions. Since it is possible to initialize the storage area corresponding to the type of initialization condition without individually setting the initialization end address to be performed, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for performing a plurality of types of initialization.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 6 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4 or 5,
The main data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization means is an initialization area setting in which an initialization start address in the main data storage means and a size of a storage area to be initialized with respect to the initialization start address are set corresponding to the type of initialization condition A size set for the initialization address from an initialization start address set in the initialization area setting unit corresponding to the type of the initialization condition when the initialization condition is satisfied. Initialize the storage area of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by setting only the initialization start address corresponding to the type of initialization condition and the size of the storage area initialized at that time, the initialization end address corresponding to the type of initialization condition is set. Since the storage area corresponding to the type of the initialization condition can be initialized without setting each individually, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for performing a plurality of types of initialization.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 7 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The main control means includes interrupt processing prohibiting means for prohibiting all interrupt processing during initialization of the storage area of the main data storage means by the initialization means.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the power interruption signal is detected during the initialization of the data stored in the main data storage means, the interruption processing is not executed. As a result of the power interruption process being performed before the process ends, the initialized data and the uninitialized data are mixed in the data to be initialized. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure to return to the normal control state.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 8 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
Comprising all data calculation means for calculating data of all storage areas including the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the main data storage means by a predetermined calculation method;
The interruption-time interruption process execution means calculates adjustment data for setting a calculation result by the all-data calculation means to a specific value in the interruption process, and stores the calculated adjustment data in the main data storage Execute the process to be stored in the means,
The main control state return processing means determines whether the calculation result by the all data calculation means is the specific value when the main control means is activated, and the calculation result by the all data calculation means is the specific value. The main control state return process is executed on the condition that it is determined that there is
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the data stored in all storage areas including the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the main data storage means is calculated by a predetermined calculation method at the time of recovery from the power interruption. It is determined whether the result is a specific value. That is, whether or not the data in the main data storage means is normal based on the contents calculated based on the data stored in all the storage areas including the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the main data storage means Therefore, the determination can be performed accurately and simply.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 9 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The microcomputer constituting the main control means can generate a plurality of types of interrupts,
The main control means includes an unused interrupt process execution means for executing an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the process before the interrupt when an unused interrupt occurs among the plurality of types of interrupts. Including,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if an unused interrupt occurs, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the microcomputer runs out of control. It is possible to prevent problems such as

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The main control means includes
Is it allowed to generate a plurality of predetermined types of winnings including a small prize winning with a game ball and a special winning with a transition of a gaming state before the display result of the variable display device is derived? A pre-determining means for determining whether or not,
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, a range of determination values that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area is determined. Range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data;
Including
The range specifying data storage means includes, as the range specifying data, overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that are determined to allow the occurrence of both the special prize and the small prize winning simultaneously. Remember,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit. Including an allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and determining that the winning determined to be permitted by the allowance determining means is permitted.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the special prize and the small role winning are determined by the predetermining means. Since it is determined that the generation is allowed at the same time, when a small winning combination is generated as a result of the game, it can be expected that a special winning is permitted. Moreover, since it is possible to determine the special prize and the small prize winning by one tolerance determining means, it is possible to simplify the processing by the prior determining means.
In addition, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values that determine that the occurrence of only the special winning is permitted, the special winning and It is also possible to store overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the judgment value that determines that both occurrences of the small role winning are allowed at the same time. As a result, even if a small winning prize does not occur, it is not denied that a special winning is permitted, so the player's expectation for the special winning can be maintained even in such a situation. .
In addition, the range specifying data storage means, as the range specifying data, single range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that only the small role winning is allowed, and the special winning And overlapping range specifying data that can specify the range of the determination value that determines that the occurrence of both of the small role winnings is allowed at the same time may be stored. As a result, even if a small winning prize is generated, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special winning is permitted. Therefore, even in such a situation, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the special winning can be maintained.

A slot machine using the game ball of the present invention is the slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10,
The main control means determines that the pre-decision means allows the generation of the special prize, and when the special prize that is allowed to be generated by the determination does not occur, the main control means determines the determination after the next game. Further includes a decision carryover means to carry over,
In the case where the determination to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carry-over means, the allowance determination means stores the numerical value data for determination input in the determination area in the range specifying data storage means. When included in the range of determination values specified by the stored overlapping range specifying data, only the small winnings are allowed, or the special winnings and the small winnings are allowed It is determined that it is not
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a game in which the occurrence of a special prize is allowed to be carried over, the range of the judgment value specified by the duplicate judgment value data is a range in which only the small prize winning is allowed, or Since it is processed as a range that does not allow the occurrence of special prizes or small part prizes, even if the game that allows the occurrence of special prizes is carried over, multiple special prizes are allowed to overlap. There is nothing.

A slot machine using the game ball of the present invention is the slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10,
The main control means determines that the pre-decision means allows the generation of the special prize, and when the special prize that is allowed to be generated by the determination does not occur, the main control means determines the determination after the next game. Further includes a decision carryover means to carry over,
The range specifying data storage means includes
First range specifying data for storing overlapping range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that the occurrence of both the special prize and the small prize winning is allowed at the same time as the range specifying data Storage means;
A second range specifying data storage means for storing only range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that the generation of winnings excluding the special winning is permitted as the range specifying data;
Including
The tolerance determination means includes
In the case where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the decision carryover means, the range of the judgment value specified by the range specification data stored in the first range specification data storage means is It is determined whether or not to indicate the occurrence of the winning is determined by whether or not the determination numerical data input in the determination area is included,
In the case where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carry-over means, the range of the judgment value specified by the range specification data stored in the second range specification data storage means, It is determined whether or not the winning is permitted by determining whether or not the determination numerical data input in the determination area is included.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a game where it is carried over to allow the generation of a special prize, a range that can specify the range of judgment values that will determine that the generation of a prize other than the special prize is allowed is specified. The occurrence of the winning is permitted depending on whether or not the numerical value for determination is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the second range specifying data storage means for storing only data. Since it is determined whether or not it is shown, even in a game in which it is carried over to allow the generation of a special prize, a plurality of special prizes are not allowed to be duplicated.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 11 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The main control means includes
Is it allowed to generate a plurality of predetermined types of winnings including a small prize winning with a game ball and a special winning with a transition of a gaming state before the display result of the variable display device is derived? A pre-determining means for determining whether or not,
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
With respect to the small role winning, it is determined so that a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of numerical data for determination input in the determination area can be specified. Small range winning range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data;
The special prize is determined so that a range of determination values that can be determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area can be specified. Special winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data;
Including
A determination value range that will determine that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the special prize is a determination that determines that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning. Including a range of decision values that overlaps the range of values,
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the small role winning range specifying data storage means, A small role winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence is permitted,
Does the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage means include the same numerical value data for determination as that used by the small prize winning allowance determining means for determination? A special winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the special winning is permitted depending on whether or not,
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the small role winning permission determining means and the special winning permission determining means,
When it is determined that both the small role winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, it is determined that the occurrence of both the small winning a prize and the special winning is permitted. To
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the determination numerical data input to the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the overlapping range specifying data, both the special prize and the small role winning are determined by the predetermining means. Since it is determined that the generation is allowed at the same time, when a small winning combination is generated as a result of the game, it can be expected that a special winning is permitted.
In addition, the range of the determination value that determines that the advance determination unit allows the occurrence of the special prize is determined to determine that the advance determination unit allows the occurrence of the small prize winning. A range of determination values that does not overlap with a range of determination values, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the special winning allowance determining means indicates that the winning is permitted, the special winning only In the case where it is determined that both the small prize winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, the small prize winning and the special winning It may be determined that both winnings are allowed, and in this way, even if no small winnings are generated as a result of the game, it is denied that special winnings are allowed. Not like this Also it is possible to maintain the player's expectation on the development of the special prize in the situation.
Further, the range of the judgment value that determines that the preliminary determination means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning is that the preliminary determination means determines that the special winning is permitted. A range of determination values that does not overlap with the range of determination values, and when the pre-determining means determines that only the small role winning allowance determining means indicates that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, If it is determined that only the winning of a prize is permitted, and both of the small prize winning permission determining means and the special winning permission determining means indicate that the winning of a winning is permitted, It may be determined that the occurrence of both of the special prizes is allowed, and in this way, even if a small prize is generated as a result of the game, it is denied that the special prize is allowed to occur. Not so this situation Even put it is possible to maintain the player's expectation on the development of special pay.

A slot machine using a game ball of the present invention is a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 11,
The main control means determines that the pre-decision means allows the generation of the special prize, and when the special prize that is allowed to be generated by the determination does not occur, the main control means determines the determination after the next game. Further includes a decision carryover means to carry over,
The pre-determining means includes
When the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the decision carry-over means, it indicates that the occurrence of a prize is permitted by both the small prize winning allowance judging means and the special prize accepting judging means. Determine whether or not
When the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize has been carried over by the decision carry-over means, it is determined whether or not it is indicated that the occurrence of a prize is permitted only by the small part prize acceptance determination means. ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a game in which it is carried over to allow the occurrence of a special prize, it is determined whether or not it indicates that the occurrence of a prize is permitted only by the small part prize acceptance determination means. Even in a game in which it is carried over to allow the occurrence of a special prize, a plurality of special prizes are not allowed to be duplicated. Further, in a game in which the occurrence of allowing a special winning is carried over, it is only necessary to make a determination by the small role winning allowance determining means, so that the processing by the prior determining means can be simplified.

A slot machine using a game ball of the present invention is a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 11,
The main control means determines that the pre-decision means allows the generation of the special prize, and when the special prize that is allowed to be generated by the determination does not occur, the main control means determines the determination after the next game. Further includes a decision carryover means to carry over,
The pre-determining means includes
Regardless of whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carry-over means, the occurrence of a prize is permitted by both the small part prize acceptance judgment means and the special prize acceptance judgment means. To determine whether or not
When the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carryover means, it indicates that both the small prize winning allowance judging means and the special prize accepting judging means allow the occurrence of a prize. Determining that the small part winning allowance judging means permits the generation of only the small part winning determined that the generation is permitted.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in a game in which the effect of allowing the occurrence of a special prize is carried over, it is indicated that both the small prize winning allowance judging means and the special prize accepting judging means permit the occurrence of a prize. Even if it is determined, since it is determined that the occurrence of only the small part winning determined that the small part winning allowance determining means indicates that the generation is permitted is permitted, the fact that the special winning is permitted is carried forward. Even in a game, a plurality of special prizes are not allowed to be duplicated.

A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 12 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
A permissible stage setting means for selecting and setting one of the permissible stages from a plurality of permissible stages having different ratios for determining that the pre-determining means allows the generation of a prize;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
The determination value data indicating the number of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the generation of the determination numerical data input to the determination area for any of the winning areas, the plurality of determination value data The pre-determining means for the numerical value data for determination input to the determination area for a winning that is stored in common for the allowable level of the type and for which the determination value data is not stored in common for the allowable level. Determination value data storage means for individually storing the determination value data indicating the number of determination values to be determined to allow the occurrence according to the type of the allowable stage;
Including
The pre-determining means is the determination numerical data input to the determination area in accordance with the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means corresponding to the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means. Including an allowance determining unit that determines whether or not the occurrence of the winning is permitted, and accepting the occurrence of the winning that is determined to be permitted by the allowance determining unit. decide,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the judgment value data storage means stores judgment value data common to a plurality of types of allowable stages for any winning, and thus is common to a plurality of types of allowable stages. With respect to the winning in which the judgment value data is stored, the storage capacity necessary for storing the judgment value data can be reduced. That is, it is possible to reduce the data amount of the judgment value data necessary for determining whether or not winning is allowed.
Note that storing the judgment value data individually according to the types of allowable stages does not necessarily mean that the judgment value data is stored individually for the number of types of allowable stages. If the judgment value data is not stored in common, the data is included in this. For example, when there are six types of allowable stages (first stage to sixth stage), the determination value data is allowed in the case where the first to third stages are common and the fourth to sixth stages are common. Depending on the type, it is stored separately.
Further, the plurality of types of permissible steps that can be set by the permissible step setting means do not mean that the proportions at which the pre-decision means allow the generation of winnings must be different from each other in all types. It is only necessary that the permissible ratio in the types of the above is different from the permissible ratio in the other types. However, it does not preclude being different in all types.
Further, the judgment value data indicating the number of judgment values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermining means may be the number of judgment values themselves or define a range of judgment values. Thus, it may be data indicating the number of determination values.
Further, when the pre-determining means includes a case where it is determined that the generation of a plurality of types of winnings is allowed simultaneously, and a case where it is determined that the generation of any type of winnings is allowed independently. The determination value data storage means is not limited to storing the determination value data for each type of winning, but a determination value indicating the number of determination values that are determined to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings simultaneously. You may make it memorize | store separately data and the judgment value data which show the number of the judgment values which will determine that generation | occurrence | production of a prize of any kind is permitted independently.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 13 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 12,
The judgment value data storage means stores different number judgment value data indicating the number of different judgment values as judgment value data to be individually stored according to the type of the allowable stage, and individually according to the type of the allowable stage. The same number determination value data indicating the number of the same determination values as the determination value data is stored in accordance with the type of winning.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the determination value data storage means stores determination value data common to a plurality of types of allowable stages for any winning, and data corresponding to the types of allowable levels for other winnings. Are stored separately, and the same number determination value data indicating the number of the same determination values is included as the determination value data stored separately according to the type of the allowable stage. Judgment value data determines the probability that the pre-determining means decides to allow each prize to occur according to the allowable stage, but for development models, this judgment value data is finely adjusted. In general, the simulation is performed (the initial judgment value data may be different or may be the same). Appropriate judgment value data obtained as a result of simulation is applied to a model for mass production. Here, even if the judgment value data becomes the same regardless of the allowable stage as a result of performing the simulation while changing the judgment value data in accordance with the allowable stage, such a type of winning is still in the allowable stage. The determination value data may be stored individually according to the type of the.
In addition, when the judgment value data is initially stored as the same number of judgment value data indicating the same judgment value individually according to the type of the permissible stage, the judgment value data that is initially registered according to the simulation result remains unchanged. If so, it can be stored in the determination value data storage means as it is as the same number of determination value data. When there is a problem with the judgment value data initially registered as a result of the simulation, the judgment value data can be changed in accordance with the allowable stage and stored in the judgment value data storage means as different number judgment value data. For this reason, since the storage mode of the judgment value data in the development model can be used as it is in the mass production model, development from the initial design stage to the mass production model can be easily performed.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 14 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermination means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area is stored. Judgment value data storage means;
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination unit,
The slot machine using the game ball is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
Input means for inputting n-bit array data signals output from the latch circuit as n-bit numeric data without changing the bit array order in a specific area different from the determination area;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means replaces the specific bit data of the n-bit numerical data input to the specific area with the other bits of the numerical data, and performs the replacement n The bit replacement numerical data is input to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, for the numerical data corresponding to the n-bit array data signal extracted from the counter circuit, the replacement numerical data obtained by replacing the data of the specific bit and the data of the other bits by the replacement means is used for determination. Input as numeric data. For this reason, the periodicity of the numerical data for determination used for the determination can be lost even if the determination value used for determining whether or not the generation of the prize is allowed to vary. This makes it possible to prevent the player from hitting the target even if the determination value is fixed for each type of winning by using the determination value data indicating the number of determination values for each winning type. Moreover, the periodicity of the numerical data input by the input means can be lost simply by exchanging specific bits, and the processing load does not increase so much without providing a special circuit.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 15 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermination means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area is stored. Judgment value data storage means;
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination unit,
The slot machine using the game ball is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
An input means for inputting an n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit to the specific area different from the determination area as n-bit first numerical data without changing the bit array order;
Numerical value updating means for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting second numerical data updated by the numerical value update means when the predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical data extracted by the numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k) is used. Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs the operation result numerical data composed of the upper k bits and the lower j bits after the operation by the operation means to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation result numerical value is not obtained by performing the operation on the first numerical data as it is using the second numerical data but by performing the operation on the upper k bits of the first numerical data. The variation of the numerical value indicated by the data increases. For this reason, the periodicity of the numerical data for determination used for the determination can be lost even if the determination value used for determining whether or not the occurrence of the winning is allowed is not varied. This makes it possible to prevent the player from hitting the target even if the determination value is fixed for each type of winning by using the determination value data indicating the number of determination values for each winning type. Further, the periodicity of the first numerical data input by the input means can be lost only by extracting the second numerical data from the numerical value updating means and calculating the upper k bits, and without providing a special circuit. , Processing load does not become so large.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 16 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermination means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area is stored. Judgment value data storage means;
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination unit,
The slot machine using the game ball is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
An input means for inputting an n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit to the specific area different from the determination area as n-bit first numerical data without changing the bit array order;
First numerical value updating means for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Second numerical value updating means for updating third numerical data different from the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
First numerical value extracting means for extracting second numerical data from the first numerical value updating means by satisfying a predetermined extraction condition;
Second numerical value extraction means for extracting third numerical data from the second numerical value update means when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical value extracted by the first numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k). Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation using data and performing a predetermined calculation using the third numerical data extracted by the second numerical value extracting means for the lower j bits;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs arithmetic result numerical data consisting of upper k bits after the operation by the arithmetic means and lower j bits after the operation to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation result is obtained by performing the operation on the upper k bits of the first numerical data instead of performing the operation on the first numerical data as it is using the second numerical data. The variation in numerical values indicated by numerical data increases. The variation is further increased by performing an operation on the lower j bits. For this reason, the periodicity of the numerical data for determination used for the determination can be lost even if the determination value used for determining whether or not the occurrence of the winning is allowed is not varied. This makes it possible to prevent the player from hitting the target even if the determination value is fixed for each type of winning by using the determination value data indicating the number of determination values for each winning type. Further, the periodicity of the first numerical data input by the input means can be obtained only by extracting the second and third numerical data from the first and second numerical value updating means and calculating the upper k bits and the lower j bits. It can be lost, and the processing load is not so great without providing a special circuit.
In claims 14 to 16, the determination value data indicating the number of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to permit generation may be the number of determination values themselves, It may be data indicating the number of determination values by defining a range of determination values.
Furthermore, in claims 14 to 16, the pre-determining means determines whether to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings at the same time, and determines whether to allow any type of winnings to occur independently The determination value data storage means is not limited to storing the determination value data for each type of winning, and the determination that determines that the generation of a plurality of types of winnings is allowed at the same time. The determination value data indicating the number of values and the determination value data indicating the number of determination values that determine whether or not to allow any kind of winnings to be independently generated may be stored separately. good.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 17 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
The control information transmitting means prohibits transmission of new control information until a predetermined transmission regulation time elapses after transmission of the control information;
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when a plurality of pieces of control information are transmitted continuously, they are transmitted with an interval equal to or longer than the transmission restriction time, so that it is possible to guarantee the time for the sub-control means to reliably receive the control information. .

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 18 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
The power interruption detection means includes monitoring voltage generation means for generating a monitoring voltage to be monitored as the predetermined power state,
The power interruption detection means monitors the monitoring voltage, and outputs the power interruption signal when the monitoring voltage becomes a predetermined value or less,
The slot machine using the game ball further includes power supply voltage generation means for generating a power supply voltage supplied to an electrical component mounted on the slot machine using the game ball separately from the monitoring voltage.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to avoid destabilization of the monitoring voltage monitored by the power interruption detection means due to driving of other electrical components, thereby preventing erroneous detection of the power source.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 19 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
The slot machine using the game ball has at least an interval of a timer interrupt process for executing a process in which the control information transmitting unit transmits the control information from the time when the power interruption signal is output by the power interruption detecting unit. Sub-drive power supply maintaining means for maintaining a minimum power supply required to drive the sub-control means over a period of time,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when a power interruption is detected during transmission of the control information, the main control means can perform a power interruption process after the transmission of the control information is completed. It is possible to reliably receive the control information transmitted when the power interruption is detected before the driving stops, and to store the received control information in the sub data storage means.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a base frame 1a (see FIG. 4) fixed to a game island, and a side of the base frame 1a. A main body frame 1b (see FIG. 4) pivotally supported at the end, and a front door 1c pivotally supported at a side end of the main body frame 1b.

  Inside the main body frame 1b of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, the three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door. .

  As shown in FIG. 2, “red 7” (black 7 in the drawing), “blue 7” (shaded 7 in the drawing), “white 7”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “BAR”, “JAC”, “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 10), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko ball used for the game and an upper plate 26 for storing (waiting for) the pachinko ball paid out from the payout device 200 are located below the fluoroscopic window 3 in the front door 1c. The provided operation console 4 is formed so as to bulge forward, and below that is a lower plate 25 for storing pachinko balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls returned from the upper plate 26. Is provided. An outlet 25a for taking out pachinko balls stored in the lower dish 25 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower dish 25, and the outlet is removed by a sliding operation of a lever 25b provided at the front portion of the lower dish 25. By opening the shutter 25c that closes the 25a, the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 flow out to a ball box (not shown) disposed below the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 are removed. It can be easily taken out.

  Further, on the upper surface of the operation table 4, a specified number determined according to the game state from the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the upper plate 26 operated when instructing to take in one pachinko ball from the upper plate 26. It is operated when instructing the take-in of the number of pachinko balls necessary to set the number of bets (3 in the normal game state and small role game described later in this embodiment, and 1 in the regular bonus described later). MAXBET switch 6, when the collected balls are settled and returned to the upper plate 26, or pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 and pachinko balls in the capture device 100 described later are returned to the lower plate 25. The settlement switch 10 that is operated when the game starts, the start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started, and the remaining value of the valuable value read from the prepaid card being received is displayed on the card unit 400 arranged in parallel. Return the prepaid card being accepted to the card lending switch 29 and the card unit 400 arranged in parallel, which are operated when receiving the lending of the pachinko ball within the range of the remaining value of the value displayed on the indicator 28 and the remaining amount indicator 28 A return switch 30 that is operated when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped is disposed on the front surface of the operation table 4, and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is provided.

  Further, the MAXBET switch 6 has a built-in BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 10) for notifying that the pachinko ball taking-in operation by the operation of the one-ball taking-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. The checkout switch 10 has a built-in remaining ball notification LED 114 (see FIG. 10) for notifying that a pachinko ball remains in a take-in preparation ball passage 110 (see FIG. 6) to be described later. The stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R that notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 10). Each is built-in.

  In addition, between the see-through window 3 and the operation table 4 in the front door 1c, the number of used balls used for setting the number of bets taken in by operating the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 was taken in. This is the sum of the number of unused balls that have not yet been used for setting the number of bets because they are less than the number of unit balls (5 balls in this embodiment) required for setting the minimum number of bets. The number of balls already paid out and the number of balls already paid out of the number of winning balls associated with the occurrence of winnings are displayed. And a game auxiliary indicator 12 that displays an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, 1 BET LED 14 that lights up that 1 bet is set, and lights up that 2 bets are set 2BETLED15, 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 for informing that the game is on, an acquisition request LED 17 for informing that the pachinko ball can be taken in, and a start for informing that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is effective Effective LED 18, wait LED 19 that lights up to indicate that it is in a wait state (a state in which the reel rotation has not started since a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game), a replay game to be described later A replaying LED 20 is provided for informing the user by lighting.

  In addition, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are returned to the lower plate 25 through the ball removal passage 120 without passing through the take-in device 100 described later at the upper position of the operation table 4 in the front door 1c. A ball removal lever 31 is provided which is operated when the operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the upper plate 26 is recessed on the upper surface of the operation table 4, and the upper surface is opened, and includes a concave storage portion 26 a for storing (holding) pachinko balls, and a storage portion 26 a. The belt-shaped rectification unit 26b rectifies the pachinko ball flowing down toward the capture device 100. The storage portion 26a is formed to be wide so as to expand in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 3) of the slot machine 1 so that the player can insert a pachinko ball. The inclined surface is inclined downward toward the device 100. Further, the storage portion 26a is provided on the upper surface of the operation console 4 at the left end when the front surface of the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front, that is, the center position in the left-right direction of the front surface of the slot machine 1 (indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 3). It is formed in a region on the left side of the center line P shown).

  On the other hand, the rectifying unit 26b is extended so as to extend in the left-right direction from the right end of the storage unit 26a toward the upper position of the right-side capturing device 100, and the front-rear width thereof is shorter than the front-rear width of the storage unit 26a. It is formed in a narrow strip shape, and the bottom surface is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the right-side capturing device 100. In the rectifying unit 26b, two rectifying plates facing in the left-right direction are erected in the front-rear width direction, and three rectifying passages are formed by these rectifying plates, respectively, and stored in the storage unit 26a. The pachinko balls are divided into three strips, flow into the take-in preparation ball passage 110, and are supplied to the take-in device 100.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26 are divided into three strips by the rectifying unit 26b and supplied to the capture device 100, so that the pachinko balls from the upper plate 26 to the capture device 100 are supplied. It is possible to improve the feeding speed of the pachinko ball by the taking-in device 100. In this embodiment, it is constituted by three straightening passages, but it may be two or four or more passages.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3, 6, and 7, a downstream part of the rectifying part 26 b, that is, a take-in preparation ball passage 110 for guiding and supplying the pachinko balls flowing in from the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100. Is formed with an outlet 121 for allowing the pachinko balls flowing down the rectifying portion 26b to flow into the ball extraction passage 120. The outlet 121 is opened and closed by an open / close shutter 122 provided to open and close in conjunction with the sliding operation of the ball removal lever 31, and by opening the open / close shutter 122, The pachinko balls flow down from the outlet 121 in the ball removal passage 120, join a return ball guide passage 109 described later, are discharged from the discharge outlet 9, and are returned to the lower plate 25. That is, by opening and closing the opening / closing shutter 122 by operating the ball removal lever 31, the ball connected to the take-up preparation ball passage 110 side that communicates the pachinko ball flow path of the upper plate 26 to the take-in device 100 or the lower plate 25. The pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is returned to the lower plate 25 without passing through the take-in device 100 by switching to either the extraction passage 120 or the return ball guiding passage 109 side and opening the opening / closing shutter 122. The In the vicinity of the outflow port 121, an open / close shutter detection switch 123 (see FIG. 10) for detecting the open / close shutter 122 located at the open position for opening the outflow port 121 is provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 are respectively disposed in a region on the right side of the center line P on the upper surface of the operation table 4. Yes. That is, with respect to the center line P, the storage unit 26a is disposed on the upper surface of the operation table 4 on the side opposite to the storage position of the storage unit 26a. The settlement switch 10 is disposed at a predetermined distance from each other on both sides in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the operation console 4.

  Therefore, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, the player uses, for example, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 with the right hand R that operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. With the left hand L on the opposite side, for example, pachinko balls stored in the lower plate 25 or the like can be charged (supplemented) into the storage unit 26a in the upper plate 26. Thereby, since the game operation by the player and the operation of taking the pachinko ball into the storage unit 26a can be efficiently performed with the left and right hands, the operability for proceeding with the game is effectively improved.

  The upper plate 26 is formed in a dish shape with an open upper surface, so that the stored pachinko balls can be taken out from above by hand, and the downstream side rectification unit 26 b is flowed down. The pachinko balls flow down in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 arranged inside the operation table 4, and are guided to a later-described taking-in device 100 arranged in the operation table 4. That is, the pachinko sphere that has flowed into the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 has a structure in which it cannot be visually recognized from the outside and cannot be taken out by hand except for a residual sphere transparent window 130 described later.

  On the inner side of the front door 1c, a reset switch 23 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, a setting described later A set value display 24 (see FIG. 10) for displaying the set value at that time during the change of the value or confirmation of the set value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, a take-in device 100 is provided for taking the pachinko balls supplied from the upper plate 26 into the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, in the take-in device 100, three sprockets 106 for ball cutting are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction corresponding to the respective strips of the take-in preparation ball passage 110. Two notches are formed on the outer periphery of the sprocket 106, and when the sprocket 106 is rotated by driving the take-in motor 101, pachinko balls that have entered the notch are discharged downward one by one. It has become. Further, the notches of the sprockets 106 corresponding to the respective strips are arranged so that the arrangement positions in the circumferential direction are different from each other (six notches of the three sprockets 106 are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees), As the three sprockets 106 rotate synchronously, pachinko balls are discharged for each sprocket 106.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 7, pachinko balls supplied to the sprocket 106 from the two take-in preparation ball passages 110 out of the three take-in preparation ball passages 110 are discharged by the two sprockets 106 respectively. Then, they merge at the downstream side and flow down to a take-in ball guide passage 108 or a return ball guide passage 109 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the case preparation members constituting the external shape of the preparation preparation sphere passage 110 and the acquisition device 100 are all formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. The pachinko sphere flowing down in the device 100 is configured to be visible from the outside through a residual sphere transparent window 130 described later.

  Below the sprocket 106, it swings when the sorting solenoid 102 is excited or released, and the flow path of the pachinko sphere discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is either the take-in ball guide passage 108 or the return ball guide passage 109. A flow path switching valve 107 for switching to one side is provided.

  The flow path switching valve 107 is composed of two flow path switching valves 107 and 107 arranged in two passages on the upstream side of the intake ball guiding path 108 and the return ball guiding path 109, respectively. The lower ends of the two flow path switching valves 107 and 107 are connected at one end to the lower end of the link member 124 whose center is pivotally supported at the tip of the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102, and horizontally in the two passages. It is fixed to the extending swing shaft 107a. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the expansion and contraction shaft 102a expands and contracts by the excitation or release of the sorting solenoid 102, so that the link member 124 rotates about the shaft portion and the swing shaft 107a is centered. In order to rotate around, the flow path switching valves 107 and 107 swing around the swing shaft 107a. Further, since the telescopic shaft 102a of the sorting solenoid 102 is always urged in the extending direction by a coil spring (not shown) that is mounted around the telescopic shaft 102a in an unexcited state, the distal end of the telescopic shaft 102a. The flow path switching valve 107 connected to each other via the link member 124 is configured to remove the flow path of the pachinko balls taken in by the sprocket 106 when the sorting solenoid 102 is not excited (off state). It is always urged toward the position (see FIG. 6) on the side of the ball guiding passage 108.

  Further, the upper end of the link member 124 is, as shown in FIG. 7, when the flow path of the pachinko sphere is switched to the return ball guide path 109, that is, the flow path switching valves 107 and 107 are in the standing posture (standing position). When this happens, it is detected by a flow path detection switch 115 provided in the vicinity of the main body of the sorting solenoid 102. In this way, depending on the detection status of the link member 124 by the flow path detection switch 115, the flow path switching valve 107 determines whether the flow path of the pachinko sphere is on the intake ball guide path 108 side or the return ball guide path 109 side. That is, the actual flow path direction of the pachinko ball by the flow path switching valve 107 can be detected.

  Further, the pachinko sphere discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106, that is, the captured pachinko sphere is detected by the first intake sphere detection switch 104 on the upstream side arranged at substantially the same height position as the sprocket 106. It has become.

  Specifically, the first take-in ball detection switch 104 is a switch that detects the passage of the pachinko sphere through a contact member 125 that is pivotally supported so as to rotate by contacting the falling pachinko sphere. As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the contact member 125 has a horizontal shaft 125a extending in the horizontal direction over three passages, and a base end fixed to the horizontal shaft 125a so that the distal end can be freely moved into and out of the passage. It is composed of two provided withdrawal and withdrawal pieces 125b and a detection piece 125c whose base end is fixed to one end of the horizontal shaft 125a, so that the distal end of the withdrawal and withdrawal piece 125b always protrudes into the passage. It is urged by a coil spring (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 6, the contact member 125 configured in this way is pushed by the contact with the pachinko ball and retracted from the passage, so that the tip of the detection piece 125 c is the first removal. Since it is detected by the incoming ball detection switch 104, the passage state of the pachinko ball can be detected based on the detection state by the first incoming ball detection switch 104.

  Further, a second intake ball detection switch 105 is disposed below the flow path switching valve 107 and connected to the intake ball guiding passage 108, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106. Thus, the pachinko balls distributed to the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side are detected. On the other hand, a return ball detection switch 103 is arranged at a connection portion with the return ball guide passage 109, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 and is assigned to the return ball guide passage 109 side by the flow path switching valve 107. A sphere is detected.

  As a result, the pachinko sphere taken into the take-in ball guide passage 108 is detected by two detection switches, the first take-in ball detection switch 104 on the upstream side and the second take-in ball detection switch 105 on the downstream side. Then, the pachinko ball taken into the return ball guide passage 109 side is detected by two detection switches, that is, the first take-in ball detection switch 104 on the upstream side and the return ball detection switch 103 on the downstream side. ing.

  In particular, the passage state of the pachinko sphere taken into the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side is determined based on the first take-in ball detection switch 104 arranged on the upstream side and the second take-in ball detection switch 105 arranged on the downstream side. For example, a pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is detected by the first intake ball detection switch 104 on the upstream side, and then the second intake ball detection on the downstream side is detected. By monitoring the transit time until detection by the switch 105, it is possible to notify that there is a possibility that fraud due to radio waves or the like has been performed or that a ball clogging has occurred. By monitoring the detection order, it is possible to avoid unauthorized detection by causing the pachinko ball to flow backward.

  Further, as described above, the first take-in ball detection switch 104 is a switch that detects the passage of the pachinko sphere through the abutting member 125 that is pivotally supported so as to rotate by coming into contact with the falling pachinko sphere. On the other hand, the second take-in ball detection switch 105 is a switch that directly detects the passage of the pachinko ball, and it can be difficult to simultaneously perform an illegal act corresponding to each of the two detection switches. .

  Further, among the pachinko spheres remaining in the downstream end of the capture preparation sphere passage 110, that is, when the rotation of the sprocket 106 is stopped, the most downstream pachinko sphere is stopped. At the downstream position, a remaining sphere detection switch 113 for detecting a pachinko sphere that stops at the most downstream position is provided. As shown in FIG. 8, the remaining ball detection switch 113 is composed of a photosensor including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides of the three passages. The pachinko sphere that stops at the most downstream position in any of the passages can be detected.

  Therefore, whether or not the pachinko ball is stopped at the most downstream position of any of the three passages by the remaining ball detection switch 113, that is, in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 as a guide route (take-in It is possible to detect whether or not the pachinko ball remains in the preparation preparation ball passage 110 formed in the loading device 100). In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the ball removal lever 31 is operated, that is, after the ball removal operation of the pachinko ball on the upper plate 26 is performed, the remaining ball detection switch 113 detects the pachinko ball. When the remaining ball notification LED 114 (see FIG. 3) is turned on, it is notified that the pachinko ball remains in the acquisition preparation ball passage 110 (in the acquisition device 100). Yes. Further, since the remaining ball detection switch 113 is disposed at a position where the pachinko ball at the most downstream position can be detected as described above, at least one in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in the take-in device 100). If the number of pachinko balls remains, the fact that the pachinko balls remain in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 (in the take-in device 100) will be notified.

  Next, when the take-in device 100 takes the pachinko ball guided from the upper plate 26 in order to set the bet number and discharges it to the game island without returning it to the player, the distribution solenoid 102 is excited. The state is stopped. In this state, since the flow path switching valve 107 is in the state (position) shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is detected by the first intake ball detection switch 104 and then taken in. After being guided to the ball guide passage 108 side and further detected by the second take-in ball detection switch 105, it flows down the take-in ball guide passage 108 to the rear side of the slot machine 1, and the inside of the game island (not shown) It is designed to be collected in the out ball tank.

  When the pachinko ball on the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the sorting solenoid 102 is in an excited state. In this state, the flow path switching valve 107 swings against the urging force of the coil spring and enters the state shown in FIG. 7, so that the pachinko ball discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is the first intake ball detection switch 104. Is detected by the return ball guide passage 109 side, and further detected by the return ball detection switch 103, then flows down the return ball guide passage 109 and is discharged from the payout opening 9 to the lower tray 25. , It is to be returned to the player. The sorting solenoid 102 is in a state where excitation is stopped except when the pachinko ball of the upper plate 26 is discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25. That is, except for the case where the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are discharged (returned) to the lower plate 25, the flow path switching valve 107 is in the state shown in FIG. 6, and the flow path direction of the pachinko balls discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 106 is The intake ball guide passage 108 is located on the side.

  Further, a return ball clogging detection switch 111 (see FIGS. 1 and 10) for detecting clogging of the ball in the passage is provided at a position near the lower plate 25 in the return ball guiding passage 109. For example, the lower plate 25 Since the tank is full, it can be detected that the return ball guiding passage 109 is clogged with a ball.

  The lower part of the above-described take-in device 100, take-in preparation ball passage 110, ball removal passage 120, take-in ball guide passage 108, return ball guide passage 109, and payout ball guide passage 208 is the operation table 4 and the operation table. 4 is covered with a cover panel 4a (see FIG. 1) that forms a lower front surface, and in particular, a pachinko ball that has flowed into the take-in preparation ball passage 110 and the take-in device 100 cannot be taken out. In the vicinity of the upper position of the capture device 100 on the upper surface of the operation table 4, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko balls remaining in the capture preparation ball passage 110 (in the capture device 100), specifically, the ball Even after the extraction lever 31 is operated and the pachinko balls on the upper plate 26 are extracted through the ball extraction passage 120, they remain in the preparation preparation ball passage 110 and enter the inside of the cover panel 4a to be invisible. A residual sphere see-through window 130 is formed as a light-transmitting portion made of a transparent panel for visually recognizing the pachinko sphere.

  As described above, since the take-up preparation ball passage 110 and the case cover of the take-in device 100 are formed of a transparent resin material, the player passes through the remaining ball see-through window 130 in the take-up preparation ball passage 110 ( Whether or not the pachinko balls remain in the capture device 100) can be visually confirmed from the outside of the slot machine 1. Therefore, the player can surely recognize when the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110, so that the pachinko ball remains in the capture preparation ball passage 110. Regardless, it is possible to avoid the player from being disadvantaged by ending the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, in the main body frame 1 b, a pachinko ball supplied from a game island or the like on which the slot machine 1 is installed is disposed above the upper plate 26 to the upper plate 26. Is provided. The pachinko balls paid out from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 extending downward from the payout device 200, and a communication port formed on the storage portion 26 a side in the upper plate 26. 13 is paid out to the upper plate 26. Further, the payout ball guide passage 208 is extended from the communication port 13 toward the lower plate 25 below, and surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 because the upper plate 26 is full are discharged ball guide passages 208. Is discharged from the discharge outlet 9 to the lower plate 25.

  The main body frame 1b faces the see-through window 3 of the front door 1c so that the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R (see FIG. 10), and the reels 2L, 2C and 2R described above are provided. A reel unit (not shown) composed of a reel sensor 33 (see FIG. 10) capable of detecting each reference position is provided, and a power supply unit (not shown) faces the front door 1c side below the reel unit 33 (not shown). Is provided. On the front face of this power supply unit is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus to be described later As a switch 36 (see FIG. 10), a setting key switch 37 (see FIG. 10) for switching to the setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in normal times In the setting change mode, a reset / setting switch 38 (see FIG. 10) that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery described later, and turns the power ON / OFF A power switch 39 (see FIG. 10), which is operated at the time, is provided. By opening the front door 1c, the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 disposed on the front side of the power supply unit can be operated from the front of the slot machine 1. It has become.

  The main body frame 1b includes a game control board 40 for controlling the game, a payout control board 60 for controlling the payout of pachinko balls, an effect control board 90 for controlling the effects, and driving of the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. A power supply board 75 that generates power and supplies the power to each unit is provided.

  Among these substrates, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed in one housing case 150 formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side. The effect control board 90 is arranged on the front door 1c side of the main body frame 1b, and the power supply board 75 is arranged in a state of being housed in the power supply unit described above.

  The housing case 150 in which the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed is composed of a case body that can house the board and a case cover that can open and close the opening of the case body, although not particularly shown. A plurality of sealing pieces into which one-way screws (screws that can be rotated only in one direction by a screwdriver) are screwed are provided on the left and right sides of the case body and the case cover.

  The storage case 150 configured in this manner is configured such that, for example, one of the left and right sealing pieces of the case main body and the case cover is screwed into only one sealing piece on each of the left and right sides, and the tip of the one way screw is Further, by screwing into a mounting hole (not shown) formed on the back surface of the slot machine 1, the case cover is opened and the housing case 150 is opened unless the mounting-related portion related to the mounting of the sealing piece or the like is destroyed. So that the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are improperly modified or replaced with an illegal board. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are housed in one housing case 150 in a state of being arranged in parallel with each other. At this time, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are board-to-board connected via male and female connectors C1 and C2 provided on opposite sides of each other.

  In this way, by housing the payout control board 60 in the housing case 150 that houses the game control board 40, the housing case 150 that houses the payout control board 60 and the housing case 150 that houses the game control board 40. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the manufacturing cost can be kept low, and both the boards are connected in the housing case 150. Therefore, the illegally crafted connection cables and connectors of the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 It can prevent effectively that components are attached.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 housed in the housing case 150 are connected to each other through the connectors C1 and C2, but via a cable or the like. Wire connection may be used. In this case, when only one of the substrates accommodated in the case main body is replaced, only one of the substrates can be easily taken out by releasing one of the wiring connections.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the pachinko balls supplied to the slot machine 1 are stored in a supply tank 204 provided at the upper back of the main body frame 1 b, and pass through a ball supply passage 210 extending from the supply tank. It flows down and is supplied to the dispensing device 200. The ball supply passage 210 includes three passages (not shown), and the pachinko balls flowing out from the replenishing tank 204 are supplied to the dispensing device 200 in a state of being divided into the three passages. . Further, a supply ball detection switch 205 (see FIG. 10) is provided at a predetermined height position above the payout device 200 in the ball supply passage 210, and the payout device 200 is provided by the supply ball detection switch 205. It is detected whether the pachinko ball supplied to is waiting. In the present embodiment, the supply ball detection switch 205 is a position where it is possible to detect that 75 balls, which is the maximum number of winning balls to be paid out by the payout device 200 when a winning is accompanied by paying out a prize ball, is supplied. The pachinko ball required for paying out the maximum number of winning balls is detected. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of balls taken in by the take-in device 100 is 15, and a maximum of 15 pachinko balls are paid out by the pay-out device 200 based on the operation of the checkout switch 10. The supply ball detection switch 205 detects whether or not a pachinko ball necessary for paying out the number of balls to be paid out is waiting based on the checkout switch 10. Furthermore, in this embodiment, lending of 25 balls is requested by a single lending request from the card unit 400. Even in this case, the supply ball detection switch 205 pays out the number of balls to be paid out based on the lending request. It is detected whether or not the pachinko balls necessary for the waiting are waiting.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the payout device 200 is provided with a sprocket 206 that rotates by driving of the payout motor 201 corresponding to each item of the ball supply passage 210. Also, below the sprocket 206, a payout ball detection switch 202 for detecting the passage of the pachinko ball discharged by the sprocket 206 based on payout of a prize ball or the like is provided, and is discharged by the rotation of the sprocket 206. After the pachinko ball is detected by the payout ball detection switch 202, it is discharged into a payout ball guide passage 208 extending from the lower portion of the payout device 200.

  The payout ball guide passage 208 extends to the lower plate 25, and the pachinko balls discharged from the payout device 200 flow down the payout ball guide passage 208 and are discharged from the communication port 13 to the upper plate 26. The surplus sphere overflowing from 26 is paid out to the lower plate 25 from the payout opening 9. In addition, a payout ball clogging detection switch 112 (see FIGS. 1 and 10) for detecting a ball clogging in the passage is provided at a position in the vicinity of the lower plate 25 in the payout ball guiding passage 208. For example, the lower plate 25 Because of the full tank, it is possible to detect whether or not the payout ball guide passage 208 is clogged with a ball.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided in parallel with a card unit 400 that accepts a prepaid card in which a valuable value is recorded. From the card unit 400 based on the operation of the above-described ball rental switch 29, In response to this request, it is possible to lend a pachinko ball using the valuable value recorded on the prepaid card being accepted.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a bet number is set using the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26. In order to set the bet number, the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. In this embodiment, when one ball take-in switch 5 is operated, one pachinko ball is taken in from the pachinko balls stored in the upper plate 26, and when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, it is stored in the upper plate 26. The number of pachinko balls necessary to set a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state at that time is taken in from the pachinko balls.

  In addition, the pachinko ball taken in by the take-in device 100 in order to set the bet number in accordance with the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 in this way passes through the take-in ball guide passage 108 as described above. It flows down, is taken into the inside of the slot machine 1, that is, the back side as seen from the side facing the player in the slot machine 1, and is discharged to the out ball tank provided inside the game island (not shown) as described above. The

  When the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. In this embodiment, 3 is defined as the specified number of bets in the normal gaming state and the small bonus game in the big bonus, which will be described later, and 1 is defined in the regular bonus, which will be described later.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination on each of the activated pay lines L1-L5 is a reel 2L, 2C, 2R. When the display result is stopped, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of pachinko balls (principal balls) are paid out from the payout device 200 according to the win, and directly through the payout ball guide passage 208, the upper plate 26 Is paid to the player and given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, different numbers of prize balls are given according to the combination of symbols. In particular, the number of unit balls (5 balls) is required to set one bet, whereas the number of prize balls awarded in response to the occurrence of a prize is the number of unit balls (5 balls). It is possible to give pachinko balls of any number according to the winnings up to 75 balls as the upper limit, and the number of winning balls given when these winnings occur Can be set more finely according to each prize.

  In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, a payout control board 60, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 75. The game control board 40 mainly controls the game. The payout control board 60 controls the payout of the pachinko balls, the effect control board 90 controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and the power supply board 75 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1. And supplied to each part.

  The power supply board 75 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the payout control board 60 and the effect control board 90 connected via. Further, a stop switch 36, a setting key switch 37, a reset / setting switch 38, and a power switch 39 are connected to the power board 75.

  On the game control board 40, the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the reel sensor 33, and the first take-in ball detection Switch 104, second take-in ball detection switch 105, return ball detection switch 103, return ball clogging detection switch 111, payout ball clogging detection switch 112, flow path detection switch 115, remaining ball detection switch 113, open / close shutter detection switch 123, Various types of switches such as a payout ball detection switch 202 are connected, and various types of switches such as the stop switch 36, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 75. The detection signals of these connected switches are input. It has become.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the above-described captured / paid-off ball display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3BET LEDs 14-16, capture request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, and replaying. LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left, middle, right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, remaining ball notification LED 114, take-in motor 101, sorting solenoid 102, etc. Electrical components are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on the control of a game control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 comprises a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The game control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 75 A reel motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a take-in motor drive circuit 50 that controls the drive of the take-in motor 101, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the sorting solenoid 102, a game The LED drive circuit that performs drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the control board 40 47. When the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power drop detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the game control unit 41, A reset circuit 49 for providing a reset signal to the CPU 41a when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not input for a certain period, and various other devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the game control unit 41.

  The game control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via these signal input terminals DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In this embodiment, among interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupts 3 and 4 are set to the timer mode, and interrupt 1 is unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. In addition, the CPU 41a, every time the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 3 reaches the first specified number, that is, the interval at which the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 3 reaches the first specified number (this embodiment In the example, an interrupt 3 is generated every approximately 0.56 ms) and a timer interrupt process (A) described later is executed, and the number of clock inputs assigned to the interrupt 4 reaches the second specified number. Timer interrupt processing (described later) is generated every time, that is, every interval (in the present embodiment, about 0.4 ms) at which the number of clock inputs assigned to interrupt 4 reaches the second specified number. B) is executed. Moreover, although the interruption 1 is set to unused, the interruption 1 may generate | occur | produce with noise etc. For this reason, when the interrupt 1 occurs, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, the priority is set to be executed in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 4, and 1. That is, if interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is executed with priority. If interrupts 3 and 4 or 1 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 takes priority. When interrupt 4 and interrupt 1 occur at the same time, interrupt 4 is executed with priority.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register 41R (see FIG. 85) for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register 41R is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b. The value is updated every execution time of one instruction. Is called.

  Further, the game control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating the numerical value of the specific address in the RAM 41c by the above-described timer interrupt process (A) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a software random number function). .

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 inputs / outputs various signals to / from the payout control board 60 via the I / O port 41d. The input / output of signals between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 will be described later.

  Connected to the payout control board 60 are the supply ball detection switch 205, the payout ball detection switch 202, the return ball clogging detection switch 111, and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 described above, and detection signals from these connected switches are input. It has come to be. As described above, the payout ball detection switch 202, the return ball clogging detection switch 111, and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 are connected to both the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60. The detection signals of the return ball clogging detection switch 111 and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 are input to both the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60.

  Also, the payout control board 60 is connected to electrical components such as the payout motor 201 described above, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a payout control unit 61 (described later) mounted on the payout control board 60. It has become so.

  The payout control board 60 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 61a, a ROM 61b, a RAM 61c, and an I / O port 61d, similar to the game control part 41, and a payout control part 61 that controls the payout of pachinko balls. A switch detection circuit 62 that detects a detection signal input from a switch connected to the substrate 60, a payout motor drive circuit 63 that controls the drive of the payout motor 201, a display drive circuit 64 that controls the drive of various LEDs, etc. A reset circuit 65 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 61a when the initialization command from the CPU 61a is not input for a certain period of time, other circuits, and the like are mounted, and the CPU 61a receives a signal output from the game control board 40, In response to a detection signal from a switch connected to the payout control board 60, a pachinko ball is The payout control is performed so that the pachinko ball is lent out in response to a request from the card unit 400 connected via the connection terminal board 70, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the payout control board 60 is directly controlled. To control automatically or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 61a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. The CPU 61a generates an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval (about 2 ms), and executes a timer interruption process (payout) described later. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 61a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the game control unit 41, the payout control unit 61 is not supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 61c is not held at the time of a power failure.

  The CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 includes a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front door 1c, an effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LEDs 55 that irradiate the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from behind. Electrical components are connected, and these electrical components are driven based on control by a later-described effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Like the game control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d. The effect control board 91 and the effect control board 90 control the effect. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the initialization command from the CPU 91a is not input for a certain period, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, In addition to performing various controls for performing the production, the control circuit mounted on the production control board 90 And controls the respective units directly or indirectly.

  As with the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interruption terminal (not shown) of the effect control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the game control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines, and the CPU 91 a An interrupt is generated based on the input, and a command reception interrupt process to be described later is executed. Further, the CPU 91a generates an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval (about 1.12 ms), and executes a timer interruption process (effect) described later. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe (INT) signal, the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority. It should be noted that other interrupts are prohibited during execution of an interrupt process in which an interrupt has occurred based on the input of a strobe (INT) signal.

  In addition, the production control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, signals input / output in the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the card unit 400 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the game control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 confirms the connection check between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the payout control board 60 side. To output a game control board connection confirmation signal. Then, the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 confirms the connection with the game control board 40 based on the detection of the game control board connection confirmation signal. In addition, the game control unit 41 gives the payout control board 60 a ball number signal indicating a value of 0 to 100 as the number of balls instructing payout by a settlement request or a payout request, Settlement request signal requesting the settlement of the number of used balls used for setting the number of bets and the number of used balls not yet used for setting the number of bets) A payout request signal for requesting is output. Then, when the payout control unit 61 detects the settlement request signal or the payout request signal, the payout control unit 61 performs payout control for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal at that time.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 61 makes a payout control board connection confirmation signal for checking the connection confirmation between the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 on the game control board 40 side, the card unit 400 to the game control board 40. And an in-operation signal indicating the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request or payout request. Then, the game control unit 41 confirms the connection with the payout control board 60 based on the detection of the payout control board connection confirmation signal, and connects the payout control board 60 and the card unit 400 based on the detection of the card unit connection signal. Based on the detection of the in-operation signal, the start, operation, and end of the pachinko ball payout operation by the payout control unit 61 are confirmed.

  The card unit 400 includes a control unit on which a microcomputer is mounted. As shown in FIG. 11, the remaining amount indicator 28 provided in the slot machine 1 is connected to the card unit 400 via a connection terminal board 70, and the remaining amount is controlled by a microcomputer mounted on the control unit. The display 28 is driven. Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the card unit 400 is connected to the above-described ball rental switch 29 and return switch 30 provided in the slot machine 1 via a connection terminal plate 70, and detection signals of these switches are detected. Is input to the control unit.

  The card unit 400 also includes a card reader / writer that reads and writes the recorded information of the prepaid card inserted from the card insertion slot, and the card reader / writer stores the recorded information read from the prepaid card as a control unit. And the record information of the prepaid card inserted is updated based on a command from the control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the card unit 400 has a card unit connection signal (VL) indicating that the card unit 400 is normally connected to the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) of the slot machine 1. The card unit READY signal (BRDY) indicating the start and end of the lending process by the card unit 400 and the lending request signal (BRQ) requesting the lending of the pachinko ball are output. The card unit connection signal is also a power source for communication between the control unit and the payout control board 60.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 60 (the payout control unit 61) has a slot machine READY signal (SRDY) indicating a state in which the pachinko ball can be lent to the card unit 400, and a pachinko ball based on BRQ. A lending completion signal (EXS) indicating the start and completion of lending operation is output.

  Further, as described above, the remaining amount indicator 28, the ball rental switch 29 and the return switch 30 mounted in the slot machine 1 are connected to the card unit 400, and the remaining amount indicator 28 is output based on the control of the control unit. The detection signal (lending operation detection signal) of the ball lending switch 29 and the detection signal (return operation detection signal) of the return switch 30 are input to the card unit 400. Then, the control unit mounted on the card unit 400 outputs the BRDY described above on condition that the valuable value read from the prepaid card being accepted remains as a result of the ball-lending switch 29 being detected. The above-mentioned BRQ is output, and the processing for requesting the lending unit for lending unit (25 balls in this embodiment) to the slot machine 1 is performed within the range of the remaining valuable value (in this embodiment, 10 times), and when the return switch 30 is detected, the prepaid card being accepted is returned.

  FIG. 12 is a circuit diagram for explaining the configuration of the power supply board 75, and FIG. 13A is a circuit diagram for explaining the configuration around the game control unit 41 in the game control board 40. FIG. 6B is a circuit diagram for explaining a configuration around the effect control unit 91 in the effect control board 90.

  As shown in FIG. 12, a rectifier circuit 302, a transformer 304, and voltage generation circuits 303, 305 to 308 are mounted on the power supply board 75. The rectifier circuit 302 converts an AC 100V AC voltage supplied from the outside into a DC voltage, and the transformer 304 transmits the DC voltage converted by the rectifier circuit 302 to an internal circuit. Then, the voltage generation circuit 303 generates + 25V DC voltage from the DC voltage transmitted through the transformer 304 and outputs it to the connector 301 and the voltage generation circuits 305, 306, 307, and 308, respectively. The voltage generation circuits 305, 306, 307, and 308 generate +24 V, +12 V (VCC), +12 V, and +5 V DC voltages from the +25 V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit 303 and output them to the connector 301. . The connector 301 is connected to the game control board 40 and the like, and the DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuits 305, 306, 307, 308 is a device mounted on the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the effect control board 90, It is supplied as a power source for driving various electrical components connected to the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the effect control board 90. In other words, the + 25V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit 303 is the various devices mounted on the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the effect control board 90, the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the effect control board 90. It serves as a power source for driving various electrical components connected to the.

  Of the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 75, + 24V DC voltage is supplied to the game control board 40, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, the take-in motor 101, and the sorting solenoid connected to the game control board 40. 102 is used as a driving power source for electric parts such as 102, and is also supplied to the payout control board 60 via the game control board 40 and used as a driving power source for electric parts such as the payout motor 201 connected to the payout control board 60. Is done.

  Further, a + 12V (VCC) DC voltage is supplied to the effect control board 90 via the game control board 40, which will be described later, which is a drive power source for devices mounted on the effect control board 90 such as the effect control unit 91. It is used as a power source for +5 V (VCC), or as a driving power source for electrical components such as the liquid crystal display 51, LEDs, and speakers connected to the effect control board 90.

  Further, a + 12V DC voltage is supplied to the game control board 40 and is connected to the game control board 40 via the power supply board 75 and other electrical components such as LEDs, indicators, sensors, and switches. (Including electrical components such as switches), and is also supplied to the payout control board 60 via the game control board 40 and connected to the payout control board 60 for electrical parts such as LEDs and switches. Used as drive power supply.

  In addition, a + 5V DC voltage is supplied to the game control board 40 and used as a drive power source for devices mounted on the game control board 40 such as the game control unit 41 and the payout control board via the game control board 40. 60, and is used as a drive power source for devices mounted on the payout control board 60.

  Further, the + 5V DC voltage supply line in the game control board 40 branches on the game control board 40 to form a + 5V (VBB) DC voltage supply line, as shown in FIG. The + 5V (VBB) DC voltage supply line is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB via a backflow prevention diode 312 and connected to the ground level on the power supply board 75 side as shown in FIG. A large-capacitance capacitor 310 is provided between them. As a result, a DC voltage of + 5V (VBB) can be stored in the capacitor 310, and even during a power failure, the voltage stored in the capacitor 310 can be supplied as a backup power source over the period until the voltage is completely discharged. It has become.

  Further, among the DC voltages output from the power supply board 75, a DC voltage of + 25V, that is, a DC voltage serving as a source of generating + 24V, + 12V (VCC), + 12V, and + 5V DC voltage is shown in FIG. As shown in (a), the pressure is reduced by the resistor 311 (about 6.6% in this embodiment), and is input to the monitoring voltage input terminal VSB provided in the power interruption detection circuit 48. The power interruption detection circuit 48 outputs a voltage drop signal from the voltage drop signal output terminal RESET when the voltage input to the monitoring voltage input terminal VSB becomes a predetermined level (+1.2 V in this embodiment) or less. It is configured to output. This voltage drop signal output terminal RESET is connected to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG of the game control unit 41 as described above, and when the voltage input to the monitoring voltage input terminal VSB becomes a predetermined level or less. The voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG of the game control unit 41. That is, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 can detect the occurrence of power interruption based on the input of the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 and can execute a power interruption interrupt process to be described later. In this embodiment, when the + 25V DC voltage becomes about + 18V or less, the voltage reduced by the resistor 311 becomes + 1.2V or less and a voltage drop signal is output. Therefore, the CPU 41a is based on the input of the voltage drop signal. Thus, the occurrence of power interruption can be detected when the + 25V DC voltage becomes + 18V or less.

  Further, the voltage drop signal output terminal RESET branches in the middle and is also connected to the signal input terminal DATA of the game control unit 41, so that the voltage input to the monitoring voltage input terminal VSB becomes a predetermined level or less. Sometimes, the voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA in addition to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG of the game control unit 41. In addition, the power interruption detection circuit 48 becomes inoperable or the voltage is not supplied after the voltage input to the monitoring voltage input terminal VSB becomes a predetermined level (+1.2 V) or less. The voltage drop signal is continuously output until it exceeds a predetermined magnitude (+1.2 V). Therefore, the CPU 41a can monitor the input state of the voltage drop signal even during the power interruption interrupt process based on the input of the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game control unit 41 and the power interruption detection circuit 48 are driven by the +5 V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit 308, and the power interruption detection circuit 48 is connected to the voltage generation circuit 303. When the + 25V DC voltage generated by the above becomes + 18V or less, which is higher than + 5V for driving these devices, the occurrence of power interruption is detected and a voltage drop signal is output. Since the DC voltage of + 5V is supplied to the game control unit 41 for a while after the CPU 41a detects the occurrence of the power interruption, it is necessary for the CPU 41a to perform the power interruption interrupt process based on the input of the voltage drop signal. Enough time can be secured.

  In the present embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the drop of + 25V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit 303, and also includes the power supply board 75, the game control board 40, the payout control board 60, and the effect control. Voltage generation circuits 305, 306, which are provided separately from the voltage generation circuit 303 for generating a + 25V DC voltage monitored by the power interruption detection circuit 48 as a power supply voltage for driving the electrical components connected to the substrate 90, Since a stable voltage is monitored by the power interruption detection circuit 48 as compared with the power supply voltage that tends to decrease depending on the driving status of these electrical components, the power interruption detection circuit 48 causes a temporary voltage drop. Thus, it is possible to prevent malfunction such as detection of occurrence of power interruption and interruption of power interruption.

  As shown in FIG. 12, a capacitor 309 is provided on the + 25V DC voltage line input to the voltage generation circuit 306 in the power supply board 75, and is supplied to the voltage generation circuit 306 from the + 25V DC voltage. Even when the voltage can be stored and the supply of voltage from the voltage generation circuit 303 is interrupted, +12 V (VCC) is generated for the voltage generation circuit 306 over the period until the voltage stored in the capacitor 309 is discharged. The voltage required to do this is supplied. Therefore, the voltage generation circuit 306 is a source of power for devices such as the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 for a certain time even when the supply of voltage from the voltage generation circuit 303 is interrupted during a power failure. The + 12V (VCC) DC voltage supply can be maintained, and the device mounted on the effect control board 90, particularly the effect control unit 91, is more than the device mounted on the game control board 40 during a power failure. It can be driven for a long time. In this embodiment, when the power interruption detection circuit 48 outputs a voltage drop signal at the time of a power failure as the capacitor 309, that is, when the + 25V DC voltage becomes + 18V or less, the production control is performed for at least 20 ms. A capacitor having a capacity capable of maintaining the drive of the unit 91 is used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the production control board 90 generates a voltage that generates + 5V (VCC) from a + 12V (VCC) DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 75 via the game control board 40. A circuit 313 is provided, and a + 5V (VCC) DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit 313 is supplied to various devices mounted on the effect control board 90, such as the effect control unit 91, and a drive power source for these devices. Used as.

  The supply line of the +5 V (VCC) direct current voltage to the effect control unit 91 is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the effect control unit 91 via the backflow prevention diode 314 and to the ground level. A large-capacity capacitor 315 is provided between them. As a result, a DC voltage of +5 V (VCC) can be stored in the capacitor, and even during a power failure, the voltage stored in the capacitor 315 can be supplied as a backup power source for a period until the voltage is completely discharged. ing.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of the pachinko balls changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5A (H) in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to a RAM abnormal error state to disable the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a effectively detects the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 in a state where the betting number can be set, the take-in operation for taking in one pachinko ball is taken in. The take-in control to be performed (take-in control process described later) is executed. Further, when the CPU 41a effectively detects the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 in a state where the bet number can be set, the bet number is set from the number of balls necessary to set the specified number of bets according to the gaming state. The number of used balls and the number of used balls subtracted from the number of used but not yet used to set the bet number, that is, the ball necessary to set the specified number of bets at that time The capture control (capture control process described later) for causing the capture device 100 to perform a capture operation for capturing the number is executed.

  In addition, when the CPU 41a effectively detects the operation of the settlement switch 10 in a state where the bet number can be set, when one or more bet numbers have already been set, or when an unused ball remains, that is, a captured ball If the game remains, the payment control unit 61 makes a payment request for the number of pachinko balls that have been acquired, and based on this, the payment request control that causes the player to return the number of pachinko balls that have been acquired. When the number of bets is not set and an unused ball does not remain, that is, when a captured ball does not remain, return control is performed to return the pachinko ball in the capture device 100.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, a small role game in a big bonus, and a normal gaming state as a gaming state. Among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus. The prescribed number of bets corresponding to the small role game and the normal gaming state is set to 3. Therefore, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when 1 is set as the bet number, and when the gaming state is the small role game or the normal gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. Then, the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if a combination of symbols called “combinations” is arranged on the activated winning line (hereinafter referred to as an effective line), Become. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the gaming status, but can be broadly divided into small roles with payout of pachinko balls (prize balls) and the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a re-playing role that can be started and a special role that accompanies the transition of the gaming state. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  Of the winning flags for each of the winning combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the replaying role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set and is cleared at the end of the game. Is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is cleared in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for the special role is won, even if the combination of the characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not cleared and it is carried over to the next game. Become. However, as will be described later, the combination of JACIN among the special roles will always be aligned with the winning game, so it will not be carried over to the next game, only the winning flags of other special roles will be If the combination of allowed combinations is not complete, it will be carried over to the next game.

  FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a winning combination table according to gaming state. The game state winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41 and is used to determine the combination determined to be a winning in the internal lottery. The combination determined according to the game state is shown. The role in this slot machine 1 is JAC, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell as a small role, Replay as a replaying role, Big bonus (1), Big bonus (2), Big bonus (3), Regular bonus as special roles (1), regular bonus (2), and JACIN are defined.

  In the regular bonus game state, JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell, which are small roles, are determined as winning roles, and are subject to lottery in the internal lottery in the regular bonus. In the small bonus game, which will be described later of the big bonus, cherry, watermelon and bell, which are small roles, and regular bonus (2), which is a special role, and JACIN are determined as winning roles. It is targeted. In the normal gaming state, the small role cherry, watermelon and bell, replay role replay, special role big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), regular bonus (1) It is determined as a winning combination and is subject to lottery in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state.

  In this embodiment, in the regular bonus game state, in addition to cherry, watermelon and bell, JAC is defined as a small role for winning. However, in the regular bonus game state, a small role game or a normal game is also provided. Similarly to the state, only cherry, watermelon and bell may be determined as winning small prizes.

  JAC is awarded when the combination of “Bell-JAC-JAC” is aligned on the active line in the regular bonus. However, in the gaming state other than the regular bonus, even if this combination is aligned, JAC is not awarded. Cherry is awarded when the symbol “cherry” is derived to any of the active lines for the left reel 2L in any gaming state. A watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the active lines in any gaming state. A bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the active lines in any gaming state. The payout of pachinko balls (prize balls) when these small roles win will be described later.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “JAC-JAC-JAC” is available on any of the active lines in the normal gaming state, but this combination is used for regular bonuses and big bonuses (small-games and regular bonuses). Even if it is complete, it will not be a replay prize. When a replay is won, the pachinko ball (prize ball) will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game (regular bonus will not be replayed) Therefore, it is substantially the same as the 15 pachinko balls corresponding to 3) are paid out.

  The big bonus is a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7”, a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7”, or “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” in any of the active lines in the normal gaming state. ”Will be awarded when the combination is complete. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. In the big bonus, a game called a small role game can be played. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. The big bonus ends when the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2325.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between a big bonus by “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”, a big bonus by “White 7-White 7-White 7”, and “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” These are referred to as big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and big bonus (3), respectively. The big bonuses (1) to (3) are further subdivided according to the order in which the winning is determined in the internal lottery. When these are distinguished, the big bonus (1) -A Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (1) -C, Big Bonus (2) -A, Big Bonus (2) -B, Big Bonus (2) -C, Big Bonus (3) -A, Big The bonus (3) -B and the big bonus (3) -C shall be called.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is arranged on any of the active lines in the small role game and the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the small role game or the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. In particular, when a regular bonus is won in the small role game, a regular bonus is provided during the big bonus, and the regular bonus medium flag is also set in the RAM 41c in addition to the big bonus medium flag. When the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2325 with the regular bonus in the big bonus, the regular bonus is terminated together with the big bonus.

  In addition, when it is necessary to distinguish between the regular bonus due to “BAR-BAR-BAR” in the normal gaming state and the regular bonus due to “BAR-BAR-BAR” in the small role game in the big bonus, the regular bonus (1) respectively. This is called regular bonus (2). In addition, the aforementioned big bonus (1), big bonus (2) and big bonus (3), regular bonus (1) and regular bonus (2) may be collectively referred to as “bonus”. To do.

  JACIN wins when a combination of “Watermelon-JAC-JAC” is available on any of the active lines in the small role game, but in a gaming state other than the small role game, even if this combination is available, JACIN wins. Not. When winning JACIN, the above-mentioned regular bonus is provided during the big bonus, and the regular bonus medium flag is also set in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 in addition to the big bonus medium flag. When the total number of pachinko balls paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2325 with the regular bonus in the big bonus, the regular bonus is terminated together with the big bonus.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning of each winning combination is allowed before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). Is. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state, the acquired internal lottery random number, the bet number set by the player, and the set value set by the reset / setting switch 38 It is performed according to the number of judgment values for the combination. In this embodiment, since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role and the lottery for the special role are performed separately in the normal gaming state, the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, Special roles may be won at the same time.

  In the regular bonus and the small bonus game in the big bonus, the reference of the combination according to the gaming state is performed based on the winning combination table according to the gaming state shown in FIG. 14 (a). It is performed based on both the winning combination table by game state shown in FIG. 14 (a) and the combination table for special roles described later shown in FIG. 14 (c).

  When the gaming state is a regular bonus (including the case where it is provided during the big bonus), JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell are sequentially read out as the target for internal lottery with reference to the winning combination table by gaming state, When the gaming state is a small role game with a big bonus, cherry, watermelon, bell, regular bonus (2), and JACIN are sequentially read out as internal lottery target roles. However, when the regular bonus winning flag (2) is set in the game before the previous time and the game is carried over without winning based on the flag, the regular bonus (2) and JACIN are not subject to the internal lottery.

  When in the normal gaming state, first, a lottery for a small combination and a re-playing combination is performed, and then a special combination is selected. In the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role, refer to the winning role-specific winning table, and in the normal gaming state, the target small role and the re-playing role, i.e., cherry, watermelon, bell, and replay are sequentially selected as the internal drawing. Read out.

  In the lottery of special roles, refer to the winning status table for each gaming state and the special role table for the special role. It is read in the order registered in another table.

  In addition, in the lottery for special roles, it is determined whether or not the special role is lost while winning is determined for a plurality of special roles. The roles and special roles are registered in the order in which they are judged. For this reason, in the special role lottery, the special combination and the special combination losing are read out in the order registered in the special-function-specific table.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (c), in the special role-specific table, the big bonus (1) -A, the big bonus (2) -A, and the big bonus are shown as special bonuses to be selected in the normal gaming state. (3) -A, big bonus (1) -B, big bonus (2) -B, big bonus (3) -B, big bonus (1) -C, big bonus (2) -C, big bonus (3 ) -C, regular bonus (1) is registered, and between big bonus (3) -A and big bonus (1) -B, big bonus (3) -B and big bonus (1) -C In the meantime, since Loss-A and Loss-B are respectively registered, in the special role lottery, Big Bonus (1) -A, Big Bonus (2) -A, Big Bonus (3) -A, Loss- A, big -Eggplant (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Big Bonus (3) -B, Loss-B, Big Bonus (1) -C, Big Bonus (2) -C, Big Bonus (3) -C The regular bonus (1) is read out in this order.

  However, in the game before the previous game, the winning flag of regular bonus (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2) or big bonus (3) is set and it is carried over without winning based on the flag. Sometimes, the regular bonus (1) and the big bonuses (1) to (3) are not subject to the internal lottery, so that the special combination lottery is not performed.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined for the internal lottery target combination is sequentially added to the internal lottery random number, and when the addition result overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won. When the winning is determined, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41. The determination value number is read according to the storage address of the determination value number registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM of the game control unit 41.

  Also, especially in the normal gaming state, when the number of judgment values determined for the small role and the re-playing role that are the target in the normal gaming state is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows It is determined that the winning combination has been won, and the winning flag of the winning combination is set.

  Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the result of the addition of the random numbers for internal lottery overflowed, the number of judgment values determined for the special role that is the target in the normal gaming state (the judgment value that was determined in response to the special role lost) Is added to the random number for internal lottery (the first acquired random number) before addition, and when the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination is won, and the winning flag of the winning combination is determined. Is set (this is not the case when the result of adding the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the special role loses overflows). That is, in the normal gaming state, both the lottery for the small combination and the re-game combination and the lottery for the special combination are performed based on the same random number for internal lottery.

  As described above, in a state where the winning flag of the regular bonus (1), the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is carried over from the previous game to the previous game. If so, there will be no special drawing.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating an example of a role-specific table for a small role and a re-playing role, and FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating an example of a role-specific table for a special role (and lose). is there. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes.

  The number of determination values for each combination (and lose) is registered corresponding to the number of bets (BET) set by the player in the game. This is because even with the same combination, the winning probability in the regular bonus may differ from other combinations. In addition, the number of determination values corresponding to the number of bets for each combination (and lose) is common regardless of the set value, and is different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table for the small role and the replaying role, as shown in FIG. 14B, the storage addresses of the JAC, cherry, watermelon, bell, and replay determination value numbers are registered in the order in which they are referenced. .

  The JAC is a role that is subject to internal lottery only with the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 1 with the regular bonus is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, watermelon, and bell are the targets that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the bet number 1 in the regular bonus and the betting in the normal gaming state or small role game A storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to Equation 3 is registered. For cherry and watermelon, the common flag is 1, and a storage address for the common number of determination values is registered corresponding to the number of bets regardless of the set value. For the bell, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Replay is a role that is subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  As shown in FIG. 14C, the special role (and loser) role-specific table includes a big bonus (1) -A, a big bonus (2) -A, a big bonus (3) -A, and a loser. A, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Big Bonus (3) -B, Loss-B, Big Bonus (1) -C, Big Bonus (2) -C, Big Bonus (3 ) -C, regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), and JACIN are stored in the order of the storage values for the number of judgment values for each combination.

  Big Bonus (1) -A, Big Bonus (2) -A, Big Bonus (3) -A, Loss-A, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Big Bonus (3)- B is a role that is an object of the internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and the storage addresses of the number of determination values corresponding to the number 3 of bets in the normal gaming state are respectively registered. For these combinations, the value of the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value.

  Loss-B, Big Bonus (1) -C, Big Bonus (2) -C, Big Bonus (3) -C, Regular Bonus (1) are roles that are subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, The storage addresses for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state are registered. For these combinations, the value of the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  Regular bonus (2) and JACIN are internal lottery targets only in the small bonus game in the big bonus, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the small bonus game is registered. . The value of the common flag for this role is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Also, the number of pachinko balls to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. However, only the JACs, cherries, watermelons, and bells, which are small roles, are the targets for paying out the pachinko balls (prize balls) when winning. Cherry, watermelon and bell can be awarded when the bet number is 1 (regular bonus) or 3 (game state other than the regular bonus), but for the bell, when the bet number is 1, That is, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, 75 pachinko balls (prize balls), which are more than the other 40 balls, are paid out.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (3), Regular Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (2), and JACIN wins are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state. Ball) is not eligible for payout. In replay, there is no payout of pachinko balls (prize balls), but since there is no need to insert pachinko balls used to set the number of bets in the next game, it is substantially the same as payout of 15 balls. Of course, the loss of special roles is not eligible for payouts of pachinko balls (prize balls).

  FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the game control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, the addresses ADD, ADD + 34, ADD + 36, ADD + 38, ADD + 40, ADD + 42, ADD + 44, ADD + 46, ADD + 48, ADD + 110, and ADD + 112 are subject to internal lottery in JAC, replay, big bonus (1) -A, big bonus (2)- Set when A, Big Bonus (3) -A, Loss-A, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Big Bonus (3) -B, Regular Bonus (2), JACIN The addresses are referenced regardless of the value, and 27, 2245, 2, 2, 2, 263, 4, 4, 4, 32, 4311 are acquired as the number of determination values, respectively, regardless of the set value.

  The address ADD + 98 is an address that is referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is the regular bonus (1) and the set value is 1, and at this time, 31 stored as the value is acquired as the number of determination values. Is done. Addresses ADD + 100, ADD + 102, ADD + 104, ADD + 106, and ADD + 108 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery is a regular bonus (1) and the set value is 2-6. As for regular bonus (1), the number of judgment values is individually stored according to the set value, but since the same number of judgment values is stored, the winning of regular bonus (1) at any set value Probabilities are the same.

  Addresses ADD + 50, ADD + 52, ADD + 54, ADD + 56, ADD + 58, and ADD + 60 are addresses that are referred to when the internal lottery target role is Lost-B and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. Addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (1) -C and the set value is 1-6. Addresses ADD + 74, ADD + 76, ADD + 78, ADD + 80, ADD + 82, and ADD + 84 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (2) -C and the set value is 1-6. Addresses ADD + 86, ADD + 88, ADD + 90, ADD + 92, ADD + 94, and ADD + 96 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target is a big bonus (3) -C and the set value is 1-6. For lose-B, big bonus (1) -C, (2) -C, (3) -C, the number of determination values is stored individually according to the set value, and different numbers of determination values are stored. Therefore, the winning (special role losing) probabilities of the loss-B, big bonus (1) -C, (2) -C, and (3) -C will differ depending on the set value.

  The address ADD + 2 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the bet number is 1, that is, in the regular bonus, the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry. The address ADD + 4 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the number of bets is 3, that is, in the normal gaming state or in the small role game, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry. The number of determination values for cherry is registered according to the number of bets, but since the same value is registered, the winning probability of cherry is the same in any gaming state. For the watermelon, the number of determination values is registered in the same manner at addresses ADD + 6 and ADD + 8.

  Addresses ADD + 10, ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, and ADD + 20 are addresses that are referenced when the bet number is 1, that is, when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the regular bonus is there. Since the same value is registered in each of the addresses ADD + 10 and ADD + 12, ADD + 14 and ADD + 16, and ADD + 18 and ADD + 20, the set value 1 and the set value 2, the set value 3 and the set value 4, and the set value are set at the regular bonus time. With 5 and the set value 6, the winning probability of the bell is the same.

  Addresses ADD + 22, ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, and ADD + 32 are each when the number of bets is 3, that is, when the target lot of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the normal game state or the small role game The address to be referenced. Since different values are registered in the addresses ADD + 22, ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, and ADD + 32, the winning probability of the bell differs depending on the set value in the normal game state or the small role game.

  FIGS. 16A, 16B, 17, 18A, and 18B are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery and the number of determination values of each combination and the winning combination. . 16 (a), (b) and FIG. 17 show an example when the player is in a normal gaming state, FIG. 18 (a) shows a case where the player is in a small role game, and FIG. 18 (b) shows an example when the player is in a regular bonus. Yes. FIGS. 16 (a), (b), FIG. 17, and FIGS. 18 (a), (b) show examples where the set value is 6, and FIGS. 16 (b) and 17 show regular cases. An example in which neither a bonus nor a big bonus winning flag is set is shown.

  In the normal gaming state, the roles that are subject to the internal lottery are regular bonus (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), cherry, watermelon, bell, and replay. In the normal gaming state as described above, the lottery for the small role and the replaying role and the lottery for the special role are performed separately for the same random number for the internal lottery. Random values for internal lottery and the number of judgment values for each role and the winning combination, random values for internal lottery in special lottery and the relationship between the number of judgment values for each role and the winning role, both lotteries The random number value for internal lottery and the relationship between the number of determination values for each combination and the winning combination will be described.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), the winning roles in the lottery of the small role and the replaying role in the normal gaming state are cherry, watermelon, bell, and replay. The number of values is 269, 68, 3582, 2245. When the cherry that is the target of the lottery of the small combination and the re-playing combination is added as the random number for internal lottery 16115-16383, the addition result overflows by adding 31 judgment values Will be won.

  Next, the watermelon that is the target of the lottery of the small combination and the re-playing combination adds 337 that is the sum of the determination value number 269 of cherry and the determination value 68 of watermelon, and the addition result overflows 16047 When ˜16114 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is won. Similarly, when 12465 to 16046 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, the replay is determined to be winning when 10220 to 12464 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery.

  The approximate winning probabilities of the small role and the replaying role calculated based on the number of judgment values are 1 / 60.9, 1 / 240.9, 1/4 for cherry, watermelon, bell, and replay, respectively. .6, 1 / 7.3. In addition, when 0-10219 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all the small combinations and re-playing combinations are lost.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the winning combinations in the special game lottery in the normal gaming state are the big bonus (1) -A, the big bonus (2) -A, and the big bonus (3) -A. , Loss-A, Big Bonus (1) -B, Big Bonus (2) -B, Big Bonus (3) -B, Loss-B, Big Bonus (1) -C, Big Bonus (2) -C, Big Bonus (3) -C, regular bonus (1). With the set value 6, the number of determination values is 2, 2, 2, 263, 4, 4, 4, 5883, 14, 14, 14, Therefore, 16382 to 16383, 16380 to 16381, 16378 to 16379, 16115 to 16674, 16111 to 16114, 16107 to 16110, 16103 to 16106, 1 When the 220～16102,10206～10219,10192～10205,10178～10191,10147～10777 has been acquired as a random number for the internal lottery, it is determined to win (loss of the special role). In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1/8192, 1/8192, 1/8192, 1 / 62.3, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1 / 2.8, 1 / 1170.3, 1 / 11170.3, 1 / 11170.3, 1 / 528.5. When 0-10146 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all special roles are lost.

  Then, a random number range (16115 to 16383) for internal lottery in which cherries are determined to be won in the lottery of the small role and replaying role, and big bonus (1) -A, big bonus (2)- A, Big Bonus (3)-A range of random numbers for internal lottery (16382-16383, 16380-16381, 16378-16379) in which A is determined to be winning overlap, so the values in these overlapping ranges are for internal lottery Are obtained as the random numbers, it is determined that the big bonus (1) and cherry, the big bonus (2) and cherry, and the big bonus (3) and cherry are won simultaneously. Similarly, a random number range (16047 to 16114) for internal lottery in which watermelons are determined to be winning in the lottery of the small role and replaying role, and big bonus (1) -B and big bonus (2) in the lottery of special role -B, Big Bonus (3)-Since the range of random numbers for internal lottery (16111 to 16114, 16107 to 16110, 16103 to 16106) in which B is determined to be winning overlap, the values of these overlapping ranges are When obtained as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that the big bonus (1) and watermelon, the big bonus (2) and watermelon, and the big bonus (3) and watermelon are won at the same time.

  Therefore, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 17, when 16382-16383, 16380-16381, 16378-16379 are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery, big bonus (1), cherry, big bonus, respectively (2) and cherry, big bonus (3) and cherry are determined to be won at the same time, and when 16115 to 16377 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that only cherry is won alone, When 16114, 16107-16110, and 16103-16106 were acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, big bonus (1) and watermelon, big bonus (2) and watermelon, and big bonus (3) and watermelon were won simultaneously. It is determined that 16047-16102 is for internal lottery When acquired as a number, it is determined that only the watermelon has been won alone, and when 12465-16046 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is determined that only the bell has been won alone, and 10220-12464 When it was acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it was determined that only replay was won alone, and when 10206-10219 was acquired as a random number for internal lottery, only big bonus (1) was won alone. And when 10192 to 10205 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that only the big bonus (2) has been won, and 10178 to 10191 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. , It is determined that only the big bonus (3) is won, and 10147 to 10177 are taken as random numbers for internal lottery. When it is, and only the regular bonus (1) is determined to have elected alone.

  And the approximate probability of winning both Big Bonus (1) and Cherry, Big Bonus (2) and Cherry, Big Bonus (3) and Cherry is 1/8192, respectively. 62.3, and the approximate probability that the big bonus (1) and watermelon, the big bonus (2) and watermelon, and the big bonus (3) and watermelon will be won at the same time is 1/4096, respectively. The probability is 1 / 292.6, and the approximate probability that the bell, replay, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), regular bonus (1) will be won independently is 1/4. 6, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 11170.3, 1 / 11170.3, 1 / 11170.3, 1 / 528.5 . When 0-10146 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the address value registered in the role-specific table for the special role are stored. From the determined number of judgment values, it is possible to specify the range of judgment values that each of the small role, replaying role, and special role wins independently, and the range of judgment values that the small role and special role will win In the internal lottery, the value obtained as a random number for internal lottery is included in the range of judgment values that each of the small role, replaying role, and special role specified by the number of judgment values wins independently. If it is determined that the small role, the replaying role, and the special role are each elected alone, and if the small role and the special role are included in the range of determination values to be won, the small role and the special role Both of them are judged to have won.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination value for the big bonuses (1) to (3) and the watermelon to be won more than the determination value range for the big bonuses (1) to (3) and the cherry to be won. The probability of winning the big bonuses (1) to (3) and watermelon at the same time is higher than the probability of winning the big bonuses (1) to (3) and cherry at the same time. Is higher.

  In the normal gaming state, when either the regular bonus or the big bonus winning flag is already set, that is, when these winning flags are set in the previous game and carried over, In addition, since only lottery of re-playing roles is performed, the random number value that determines each winning combination and the winning probability of each winning combination are as shown in FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 18A, in the small role game, cherry, watermelon, bell, regular bonus (2), and JACIN are subject to internal lottery, and the number of determination values is 269, 68, 3582, 32, 4311. Therefore, when 16115-16383, 16047-16114, 12465-16046, 12433-12464, and 8122-12432 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that the winner is won. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 60.9, 1 / 240.9, 1 / 4.6, 1/512, and 1 / 3.8. When 0 to 8121 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18B, in the regular bonus, JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell are subject to internal lottery, and the number of determination values is 27, 269, 68, 15919. When 16383, 16088 to 16356, 16020 to 16087, and 101 to 16019 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that the winner is won. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of each combination are 1 / 606.8, 1 / 60.9, 1 / 240.9, and 1 / 1.03. When 0 to 100 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, acquisition of random numbers for internal lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The random numbers for the internal lottery are obtained by extracting random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 by the hardware random number function and processing them by software by the CPU 41a. Note that the least significant bit of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 or the processed random number is called the 0th bit, and the most significant bit is called the 15th bit.

  FIG. 19A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number generation circuit 42 in detail. As shown in the figure, the random number generation circuit 42 includes a pulse generation circuit 42a, a lower counter 42b, and an upper counter 42c. The lower counter 42b and the upper counter 42c are both 8-bit (1 byte) counters, the lower counter 42b is the 0th to 7th bits, and the upper counter 42c is a total of 16 bits from the 8th to 15th bits. The data signal is output.

  The pulse generation circuit 42a outputs a pulse signal at a frequency that is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a and is not an integral multiple thereof (preferably relatively prime). The pulse signal output from the pulse generation circuit 42a is clocked into the lower counter 42b.

  The lower counter 42b alternately inverts the 0th bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit 42a. Assuming that positive logic is applied, a logical value of H level corresponds to 1 and a logical value of L level corresponds to 0. In the case of negative logic, a logic value of 1 may be read as L level, and a logic value of 0 may be read as H level. When the level of the 0th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the 0th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the level of the 1st bit data signal is changed to H level. Inverted alternately with L level.

  Similarly, when the level of the (m−1) th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the (m−1) th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the mth bit data The signal level is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. The carry signal is output every time the level of the seventh bit data signal changes from H level, that is, the logical value of the seventh bit data signal changes from 1 to 0. The carry signal output from the lower counter 42b is clocked into the upper counter 42c.

  The upper counter 42c alternately inverts the eighth bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a carry signal is input from the lower counter 42b. Each time the level of the 9th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, the level of the 9th bit data signal is alternately inverted between H level and L level. Similarly, every time the level of the m−1th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the mth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level.

  The logic value of a 16-bit data signal in which the data signal of the lower counter 42b is the lower 8 bits and the data signal of the upper counter 42c is the upper 8 bits is 0 (0000h) every time the pulse generation circuit 42a outputs the pulse signal. ) → 1 (0001h) → 2 (0002h) →... → 65535 (FFFFh) The values are updated so as to be continuous every update, and the maximum value 65535 (FFFFh) is next to the initial value 0 (0000h). The value circulates and is output from the random number generation circuit 42.

  The sampling circuit 43 includes a latch circuit, and latches and latches a 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 at that time based on a sampling command (when the start switch 7 is operated) from the CPU 41a. Output the data signal. The CPU 41a extracts numerical data corresponding to the data signal input from the sampling circuit 43 via the I / O port 41d as a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. In the following description, the data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 is described as a random number corresponding to the logical value.

  FIG. 19B is an explanatory diagram until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. The random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in a 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a uses the other general-purpose register or the work area of the RAM 41c to lower-order the bytes of the general-purpose register 41GR (value extracted from the lower-order counter 42b). And the value of the upper byte (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c) are exchanged.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation with the value 8080h of the random number in which the upper byte and the lower byte are replaced with respect to the extracted random number. Since the processing work of the CPU 41a is 1 byte, the logical OR operation is actually performed sequentially on the upper byte and the lower byte. By this OR operation, the 15th bit and the 7th bit are always 1. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit.

  The CPU 41a acquires the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and sequentially adds the number of determination values of each combination to this It becomes. Since the 15th and 14th bits of the random number for internal lottery are always 1, the random number for internal lottery is a random number having a size of 14 bits (16384), which is substantially 0 to 16383. It takes a value.

  Note that interrupts to the CPU 41a are prohibited from the extraction of random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 to the end of processing. This is to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten in the interrupt processing routine when an interrupt is generated to the CPU 41a.

  Next, the arrangement of symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and stop control will be described. As described above, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped within a drawing range within 4 symbols from when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. The symbol to be stopped is selected according to the setting status of the winning flag, and the symbols of the winning combination in the drawing range of 4 symbols are aligned and stopped on the effective line set in each game. If you can, stop them all together. Symbols that have not been selected will be stopped in the range of 4 symbols.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, “watermelon”, “bell”, and “JAC” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less on all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the drawing range of 4 symbols Thus, the variable display device 2 can always be stopped at any position. In other words, when the winning flags of watermelon, bell, replay, JAC, and JACIN are set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c by the game control unit 41 will be described. The RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 has a 512-byte storage area. As shown in FIG. 20, addresses 7E00 (H) to 7FFF (H) are assigned to each byte, and important work , General work, special work, set value work, unsaved work, unused area, stack area.

  The important work is an area of 40 bytes from 7E00 (H) to 7E27 (H), and it is a big bonus such as various display and LED display data, I / O port 41d input / output data, game time counter, etc. This work stores data that is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end.

  The general work is a 178-byte area of 7E28 (H) to 7E8E (H), 7EBA (H) to 7F04 (H), stop symbol data, the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) to be paid out, winning combination flags, This work stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as the total number of paid-in pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus.

  The special work is a 39-byte area from 7E8F (H) to 7EB5 (H), and data for transmitting commands to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., are initialized only before the start of setting. The work to be stored.

  The set value work is a 1-byte area of 7EB6 (H) and is a work in which the set value is stored. After 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode), It is corrected to 1, and the set value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored.

  The unsaved work is a 3-byte area of 7EB7 (H) to 7EB9 (H), and is a work that holds the state of various switches as the state of the stop switch 36. The data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of startup. A value is always set regardless of whether it is present or not.

  The unused area is a 205-byte area from 7F05 (H) to 7FD1 (H) and is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later is satisfied. Then it will be initialized.

  The stack area is a 45-byte area from 7FD2 (H) to 7FFF (H), and the area from 7FD2 (H) to stack pointer-1 is an unused stack area in the stack area. The area of the stack pointer to 7FFF (H) is an in-use stack area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored. Of these, the unused stack area is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later is satisfied, as in the case of the unused area. Therefore, it is not initialized.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21A, the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 does not destroy the data in the RAM 41c before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, or at the time of activation. At the time, when four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the use of the storage area of the RAM 41c is used. All areas except the middle stack area (including unused areas and unused stack areas) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In the ROM 41b, the start address of the area to be initialized and the initialization size indicating the size of the area to be initialized are registered corresponding to each of initializations 1 to 4, and when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c. Refers to the initialization table, acquires the start address and initialization size corresponding to any of initializations 1 to 4 according to the initialization condition, sets a pointer to the start address, and sets the initialization size . If the initialization size includes the size of the unused stack area, the size of the unused stack area (stack pointer-7FD2 (H)) is calculated and the initialization size is set. Then, the area of the address corresponding to each byte from the initialization address where the pointer is set is cleared to 0, and each time the byte is cleared, the initialization size is decremented by 1 and the pointer is advanced by 1. Run until zero. That is, when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c, it does not initialize each area according to the initialization condition, but initializes an area of a specified size from a specified address.

  FIG. 21B is a diagram showing an initialization table. In the initialization table, the start address and the initialization size are registered corresponding to the initializations 1 to 4 as described above.

  In initialization 1, 7E00 (H) is registered as the start address, and 1D3 (H) + M (size of unused stack area: (stack pointer−7FD2)) bytes are registered as the initialization size. 7E00 (H) to 1D3 (H) + M bytes are initialized. Then, as shown in FIG. 20, important work, general work, special work, set value work, unsaved work, general work, unused area, and unused stack area are allocated to address areas that are continuous from 7E00 (H). The sum of the sizes of these areas is 1D3 (H) + M bytes. Therefore, in initialization 1, 7D00 (H) is initialized to 1D3 (H) + M bytes, so that These areas are initialized in the order of general work, special work, set value work, non-saved work, general work, unused area, and unused stack area.

  In initialization 2, two start addresses and initialization sizes for each address are registered. This is because the general work initialized in the initialization 2 is allocated to two separate address areas. In initialization 2, 7E28 (H) is registered as the start address of the area to be initialized first, 67 (H) bytes are registered as the initialization size, and 7EB7 (H) is set as the start address of the area to be initialized next. Since 118 (H) + M bytes are registered as the conversion size, in initialization 2, an area for 7E28 (H) to 67 (H) bytes and an area for 7EB7 (H) to 118 (H) + M bytes Is initialized. The size of the general workpieces 7E28 (H) to 7E8E (H) is 67 (H) bytes. As shown in FIG. 20, the remaining general workpiece area, unused area, and unused stack area are 7EB7 ( H) are allocated to consecutive address areas, and the total size of these areas is 118 (H) + M bytes. Therefore, in initialization 2, 7E28 (H) to 67 (H) bytes are initialized, By initializing 7EB7 (H) to 118 (H) + M bytes, these areas are initialized in the order of general work, unused area, and unused stack area.

  Also in the initialization 3, two start addresses and initialization sizes for each address are registered. This is because the non-saved work initialized in the initialization 3 and the unused area and the unused stack area are allocated to two separate address areas. In initialization 3, 7EB7 (H) is registered as the start address of the area to be initialized first, 3 (H) bytes are registered as the initialization size, and 7F05 (H) is set as the start address of the area to be initialized next. Since CD (H) + M bytes are respectively registered as the conversion size, in initialization 3, an area from 7EB7 (H) to 3 (H) bytes and an area from 7F05 (H) to CD (H) + M bytes Is initialized. As shown in FIG. 20, the unsaved work is an area for 3 bytes from 7EB7 (H), and the unused area and the unused stack area are allocated to address areas that are continuous from 7F05 (H). Since the total size of these areas is CD (H) + M bytes, in initialization 3, 7EB7 (H) to 3 (H) bytes are initialized, and 7F05 (H) to CD (H) + M bytes. When the minutes are initialized, these areas are initialized in the order of the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area.

  In initialization 4, 7F05 (H) is registered as the start address and CD (H) + M bytes are registered as the initialization size. Therefore, in initialization 4, an area from 7F05 (H) to CD (H) + M bytes is registered. Is initialized. As shown in FIG. 20, the unused area and the unused stack area are allocated to address areas that are continuous from 7F05 (H), and the total size of these areas is CD (H) + M bytes. Therefore, in initialization 4, the CD (H) + M bytes from 7F05 (H) are initialized, so that these areas are initialized in the order of the unused area and the unused stack area. .

  In addition, initializations 1 and 3 among initializations 1 to 4 are processes performed after the CPU 41a is started and before an interrupt is permitted. On the other hand, the initializations 2 and 4 are processes performed in a state where interrupts are permitted, but interrupts are prohibited during the execution of these initializations 2 and 4. That is, interrupts are always prohibited during the initializations 1-4.

  In this embodiment, to initialize the storage area of the RAM 41c is to clear the data in the target area to 0, that is, to update the value of the target area to 0. The area data may be rewritten to a predetermined initial value.

  Next, control when the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 transmits a command to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a command transmitted from the game control unit 41 to the effect control board 90.

  The BET command is a command indicating that the acquisition is started or that the bet number is set to 1. When the 1-ball acquisition switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated and the acquisition control is started, the acquisition is started. A BET command indicating that the betting has started is transmitted, and a BET command indicating that the betting number is set is 1 when the number of pachinko balls captured reaches the unit ball number and the betting number is set. Is done.

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the symbol to stop on the corresponding reel, and every time the reel is controlled to stop. Sent.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of winning balls at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of paying out pachinko balls due to winning or the like, and is transmitted when the payout of pachinko balls is started. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of the pachinko balls, and is transmitted when the payout of the pachinko balls is finished.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of a stop state. When the stop state is entered after the end of the big bonus, a stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted and a reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  The error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state.When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of a stop state is transmitted, and a reset operation is performed to indicate the error state. At the time of cancellation, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Of these commands, commands other than the initialization command are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (A) described above. Is done. In addition, when transmitting the error command which shows RAM abnormality error at the time of starting of the game control part 41, it transmits in a starting process instead of a timer interruption process (A). This is because, as will be described later, interrupts are prohibited when a RAM abnormality error occurs when the game control unit 41 is activated.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of the command queue described above. The command queue is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated. In addition, in the area for storing each command, a numerical value (0 to 15) indicating an area number is set in association with each storage area. Further, a transmission pointer indicating the area number of the area where the command to be transmitted next is stored and a storage pointer indicating the area number of the area where the command is to be stored next are set in the command queue. The transmission pointer is incremented by 1 every time an unsent command stored in the command queue is transmitted, and the storage pointer is incremented by 1 when storing the command. The area number indicated by the transmission pointer and the area number of the storage pointer are the same number when transmitted and when all areas of the command queue are full due to an untransmitted command. If an unsent command is stored, the unsent flag is set. Therefore, if the area number indicated by the send pointer is the same as the area number of the stored pointer, the unsent flag is set. If it is, the command queue is shown to be full of unsent commands, and if the unsent flag is not set, it is shown that the unsent commands are empty.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a generates the interrupt 3 at an interval of about 0.56 ms as described above, and executes the timer interrupt process (A) by the generation of the interrupt 3, so that the timer interrupt process (A ) Is executed approximately every 0.56 ms. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in the timer interrupt process (A), timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and a process unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 is about 2.24 ms. It will be performed at intervals. Since the command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the command queue is executed by the timer interrupt 2, the command transmission process is also executed at an interval of about 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the effect control unit 91 acquires the buffered command, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (effect) that is executed at intervals of about 1.12 ms. Therefore, every time the CPU 41a executes the timer interrupt process (A), that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of about 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the effect control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally. There is.

  However, in this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once every four timer interrupt processes (A), that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms, so that two commands are consecutive. Are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms, and the effect control unit 91 side can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  FIGS. 25A and 25B are timing charts showing an example of command transmission status in this embodiment.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25A, commands are generated according to the progress of the game and stored in the command queue. When an unsent command stored in the command queue is detected in the command transmission process in timer interrupt 2, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command stored in the command queue Command is sent.

  Specifically, when an unsent command stored in the command queue is detected in the command transmission process, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 15 is acquired, and the acquired value is corrected to 2 to 17 The range value (L) is set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value (L) is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1, and the delay counter value becomes 0. At that time, the command stored in the command queue is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (about 2.24 ms), more specifically, a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value (L) of the delay counter acquired at that time. Time ({L-1) multiplied by the execution interval of command transmission processing (about 2.24 ms) {(L) is a value of 2-17, so 2.24 to 35.84 ms} should be transmitted. It becomes.

  Also, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the command queue, and a newly generated command is set in an empty area of the command queue without waiting for transmission of the command stored in the command queue. It is possible to store. That is, a plurality of commands can be accumulated. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. Note that this is not the case when the command queue is full of unsent commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the command queue, these commands are stored in the order of generation, and in the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the command queue. That is, commands stored in the command queue are always transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  In addition, when a plurality of unsent commands are stored in the command queue, after the first generated command is transmitted, the unsent commands are stored in the command queue again in the command transmission process to be executed next. If the command is stored, the delay time (delay counter value) of the command is set at that time, and the command is transmitted when the delay time has elapsed. Therefore, when a plurality of commands are stored in the command queue, even if each transmission interval is the shortest (when 2 is determined as the delay counter value), as shown in FIG. It is transmitted with an interval of 4.48 ms (2.24 × 2 ms). In other words, transmission of a new command is prohibited until 4.48 ms elapses after the command is transmitted.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is 21, and the rotation speed is approximately 750 ms and the rotation is 1 rotation (80 rotations per minute). The time required for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R to move one symbol is about 35.7 ms (= 750/21 ms).

  Further, in order to prevent an effect that assists the presentation on the effect control board 90 side, when the CPU 41a transmits a command to the effect control board 90, the maximum delay time is set. It is necessary to set a time longer than the time required for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to move one symbol. That is, in this embodiment, it is necessary to set a time of 35.7 ms or more as the maximum delay time.

  On the other hand, in order to prevent the difference between the effect produced by the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 and the control by the game control unit 41 and causing a sense of incongruity, the maximum delay time in the command transmission process is prevented. It is preferable to make the value as short as possible. That is, in the case of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the maximum value of the delay time is set to 35.7 ms or more and as close as possible to 35.7 ms. In the present embodiment, as described above, the delay time in the command transmission process can be set only for a time corresponding to a multiple of the execution interval (about 2.24 ms) of the command transmission process, and a multiple of these 2.24 ms. Therefore, the minimum value among the values of 35.7 ms or more is 2.24 ms × 16 = 35.84 ms. Therefore, the optimum maximum delay time in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is 35.84 ms.

  For this reason, it is only necessary to set 17 as the upper limit value of the delay counter value (L), and in this way, the maximum value of the delay time is prevented in order to prevent the effect of assisting in the present embodiment. It is possible to set the minimum value among the values that are equal to or greater than the maximum value of the minimum delay time required.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25B, a power failure occurs before the delay time {2.24 × (La−1) ms} set when an untransmitted command is detected. When a power interruption interrupt process described later is executed, the command stored in the command queue, the transmission pointer, the value of the stored pointer, the untransmitted flag, and the delay at that point The counter value La ′ is backed up. If untransmitted commands remain after the interruption of power is restored and the interrupt prohibition is canceled, the delay counter value La ′ set at that time becomes zero. Send a send command. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, subtraction is resumed from the value La ′ of the delay counter at the time of power interruption, and the delay time {2.24 × (La′−1) ms} has elapsed after the restoration of power interruption. By doing so, an unsent command is sent.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the effect control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 receives the command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 is for RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  Next, operation states of the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 and the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 during a power failure will be described based on the timing chart of FIG.

  First, the power interruption detection circuit 48 outputs a voltage drop signal to the game control unit 41 when a + 25V DC voltage (hereinafter referred to as a power supply monitoring voltage) becomes + 18V or less (ta1). If the CPU 41a is executing a basic process such as a game process to be described later when the voltage drop signal is input, the interruption process is executed by interrupting the basic process. Also, if a voltage drop signal is input at the same time as the request for timer interrupt processing (A) (interrupt 3), power interruption interrupt processing takes priority over timer interrupt processing (A). Processing is executed. If the CPU 41a receives a voltage drop signal during the execution of the timer interrupt process (A), the power interruption interrupt process is executed when the timer interrupt process (A) being executed ends. ta2). In this embodiment, the power monitoring voltage becomes +18 V at which the voltage drop signal is output, rather than the sum of the maximum time required for the timer interrupt process (A) and the maximum time required for the power interruption interrupt process. Since the time to drop to the voltage (+ 5V) (ta3) that can drive the CPU 41a is longer, even if the CPU 41a is executing the timer interrupt process (A) when a power failure occurs, the power interruption interrupt process is performed. The time that can be done reliably is secured.

  In addition, + 12V (VCC), which is the source of the power supply voltage (+ 5V (VCC)) of the effect control unit 91, is delayed in voltage drop by the capacitor 309 mounted on the power supply board 75 even during a power failure. Until a sufficient time has passed to buffer the command transmitted in the timer interrupt process (A) when a power failure occurs and to acquire the buffered command in the subsequent timer interrupt process (effect) (ta4) Since the voltage (+ 7V) that can drive the CPU 91a is maintained, even when the command is buffered from the game control board 40 when a power failure occurs, the command is surely acquired and reflected as data to be backed up in the RAM 91c. The time to let it be secured. In this embodiment, a voltage that can drive the CPU 91a is maintained until a time of 20 ms or more has elapsed from the time when the power monitoring voltage becomes +18 V or less. It is only necessary to maintain a voltage capable of driving the CPU 91a over a time equal to or longer than the execution interval of the CPU 2 (a time sufficient for the CPU 91a to reliably acquire a command).

  Next, the operation state of the slot machine 1 based on the control of the game control unit 41 and the payout control unit 61 described above will be described based on the timing charts of FIGS.

  FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing an operation state when a winning accompanied with payout of a winning ball occurs or when an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains.

  When a winning with payout of a winning ball occurs or when an operation of the checkout switch 10 is detected in a state where a captured ball remains, the game control unit 41 pays out the value of the ball number signal by a payout request. The number of balls requested (number of payout requests) or updated to a value indicating the number of balls requested for payout (the number of payout requests) according to the settlement request (tb1), and the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is turned on (tb2). When the payout control unit 61 detects that the payout request signal or the checkout request signal is on, the game control unit 41 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the checkout request by turning on the operation signal (tb3). ). Then, a payout operation for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal is started (tb4), and when the payout operation is completed (tb5), the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request or the settlement request is made with the in-operation signal turned off. Is notified to the game control unit 41 (tb6). Next, when the game control unit 41 detects the off-operation signal, it confirms the end of the payout operation, and sets the payout request signal or the settlement request signal to off (tb7). In addition, the game control unit 41 validates the detection of the payout ball by the payout ball detection switch 202 only during the period (tb3 to tb6) from when the on-operation signal is detected to when off is detected. Every time a payout ball is detected, the value of an unpaid ball counter (a counter that stores the number of payout balls that have not been paid out of the number of payout requests based on the payout request) set in the RAM 41c or an unsettled ball counter The value of (the counter that stores the number of unsettled spheres that have not been paid out of the number of settlement requests based on the settlement request) is subtracted and updated. In addition, during the payout request, a payout ball is detected, and every time the value of the unpaid ball counter is decremented by 1, the value of the number of payout balls displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball display 11 is displayed. One by one is added and updated.

  FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing an operation state when an error occurs during a payout request or a settlement request.

  The game control unit 41 starts counting the payout communication error determination time from the time (tc1) when the payout request signal or the payment request signal is turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 28A, when the on-operation signal cannot be detected even after the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payout request signal or the payment request signal is turned on (tc1) (tc2). In other words, when the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request cannot be confirmed, it is determined as a payout communication error, the error control is performed, and an error code indicating the payout communication error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Display and inform. Even if the payout communication error is controlled to an error state, the payout request signal or the payment request signal is kept on, and the monitoring of the operating signal is continued. In this state, when the on signal of the operating signal is detected and then the off signal of the operating signal is detected (tc3), that is, when the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request is confirmed. Automatically cancels the error state (tc4).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28B, the on signal of the operating signal is detected before the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time (tc1) when the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is turned on. Pachinko ball payout based on payout request or settlement request, ie, when the operation signal off cannot be detected (tc5) even after the payout communication error determination time has elapsed since the request signal or settlement request signal was turned on (tc1) Even when the end of the operation cannot be confirmed, it is determined as a payout communication error, the error is controlled, and an error code indicating the payout communication error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for notification. Even in this case, the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is kept on, and the monitoring of the operating signal is continued. In this state, when the on signal of the operating signal is detected and then the off signal of the operating signal is detected (tc6), that is, when the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request is confirmed. Automatically cancels the error state (tc7).

  Thus, in this embodiment, after the game control unit 41 makes a payout request or a payment request, regardless of whether or not the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request is confirmed, Even if the payout communication error determination time elapses from the time when the checkout request is made, if the end of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request or the checkout request cannot be confirmed, it is determined as a payout communication error. . That is, the payout communication error is determined based only on the payout communication error determination time counted from the time when the payout request or the settlement request is made. Even when it is determined as a payout communication error and controlled to an error state, communication with the payout control unit 61 continues and when the end of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request or the payment request can be confirmed. The error state is automatically cleared.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, even if the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payout request signal or the checkout request signal is turned on, the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the checkout request is performed. When the end cannot be confirmed, a payout communication error is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  FIG. 29 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the operation status when an error occurs during a payout request or a settlement request.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 29A, the game control unit 41 starts counting the first payout communication error determination time from the time point (td1) when the payout request signal or the payment request signal is turned on. When the on-operation signal cannot be detected (td2) even after the first payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payout request signal or the checkout request signal is turned on (td1), that is, the payout request or the checkout request. If the start of the pachinko ball payout operation cannot be confirmed, it is determined as a payout communication error, and the error state is controlled. Even in this case, while the payout communication error is controlled to the error state, the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is kept on, and the monitoring of the operating signal is continued. In this state, when the on signal of the operation is detected (td3), that is, when the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request is confirmed, the error state is automatically canceled ( td4).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the game control unit 41 starts counting the second payout communication error determination time from the time (td5) when the on-operation signal is detected, and the on-operation signal is turned on. When the operation signal off cannot be detected even after the second payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time of detecting (td5) (td6), that is, the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request is terminated. If it cannot be confirmed, it is determined as a payout communication error, and the error state is controlled. Even in this case, while the payout communication error is controlled to the error state, the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is kept on, and the monitoring of the operating signal is continued. In this state, when the off-operation signal is detected (td7), that is, when the completion of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request is confirmed, the error state is automatically canceled ( td8).

  As described above, in this modification, even if the first payout communication error determination time has elapsed after the game control unit 41 makes a payout request or a payment request, a payout operation of a pachinko ball based on the payout request or the payment request. If the second payout communication error determination time has elapsed after confirming the start of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request or the payment request, even if the second payout communication error determination time has elapsed, When the end of the ball payout operation cannot be confirmed, a payout communication error is determined. In other words, the payout communication error occurs when the first payout communication error determination time has elapsed in the period from when the payout request or settlement request is made until the start of the payout operation is confirmed, and after the start of the payout operation is confirmed. The determination is made separately when the second payout communication error determination time elapses until the end of the payout operation is confirmed. Further, even when the payout communication error is determined and controlled to the error state, communication with the payout control unit 61 is continued, and the start or end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request or the payment request can be confirmed. At this point, the error state is automatically cleared.

  FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing an operation state when a lending process is performed by the card unit 400 in response to the operation of the ball lending switch 29 being detected.

  When the operation of the ball lending switch 29 is detected, the control unit of the card unit 400 turns on BRDY and notifies the payout control unit 61 of the start of lending processing (te1). Further, the BRQ is turned on to request the lending of pachinko balls of the number of lending units (te2). When the payout control unit 61 detects that the BRQ is on, it checks whether the VL is on, that is, whether it is normally connected to the card unit 400, and on the condition that the VL is on. Turn on EXS and notify the card unit 400 of the start of the pachinko ball lending operation based on BRQ (te3). Then, a lending operation for lending a pachinko ball of the number of lending units is started (te4), and when the lending operation is finished (te6), the end of the lending operation of the pachinko ball based on BRQ is notified to the card unit 400 with EXS off. (Te7). Even if BRQ is detected to be on, if VL is not on, EXS is not turned on and pachinko ball lending operation based on BRQ is not performed. Further, the payout control unit 61 can perform a lending operation by detecting BRQ on regardless of whether the game control unit 41 is in the BET process. On the other hand, when the control unit of the card unit 400 turns BRQ on, when it detects that EXS is on, it confirms that the lending operation has started, turns BRQ off (te5), detects EXS on, When off is detected, it is confirmed that the lending operation has been completed, and if the specified number of lending requests are not completed within the range of the remaining valuable value, BRQ is turned on again and lending of pachinko balls of the number of lending units is requested. (Te8). Also, when it is confirmed that the lending operation has been completed by detecting the EXS off, if the valuable value required for the lending request does not remain or if the specified number of lending requests have been completed, lending BRDY as off The end of the process is notified to the payout control unit 61 (te9).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the control unit mounted on the card unit 400 is provided with the condition that the valuable value read from the prepaid card being accepted remains as a result of the operation of the ball rental switch 29 being detected. The above-mentioned BRDY is turned on and the start of the lending process is notified to the payout control unit 61, and the process of requesting the lending of the pachinko balls of the number of lending units with the above-mentioned BRQ turned on is within the range of the remaining valuable value. The specified number of times (in this example, 10 times), and when the valuable value required for the loan request does not remain or when the specified number of loan requests is completed, BRDY is turned off and the end of the loan processing is completed. 61 is notified. For this reason, the payout control unit 61 performs a series of lending controls for performing a lending operation a plurality of times based on the lending request while detecting ON of BRDY.

  In the present embodiment, the lending control is started by detecting the on of BRDY, and in the state where the on of BRDY is detected, the lending operation is performed by detecting the on of the BRQ, that is, the lending request. A series of lending control is terminated by detecting the BRDY off. That is, since lending control is performed by detecting BRDY on, the lending request in the present invention means that the control unit of the card unit 400 turns on BRDY and turns on BRQ in that state.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing an operation state in the case where a winning accompanied by paying out a prize ball occurs during the execution of the lending operation.

  When the payout control unit 61 detects that the payout request signal is on during the lending operation (tf1), the payout control unit 61 waits until the lending operation for the lending unit number of balls is completed, and when the lending operation is completed (tf2), the BRQ is turned on again. In other words, even when a lending request is made, the game control unit 41 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request by turning on the operation signal (tf3). Then, a payout operation for paying out the number of pachinko balls indicated by the ball number signal is started (tf4), and when the payout operation is completed (tf5), the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request is ended with the in-operation signal turned off. The game control unit 41 is notified (tf6). At this time, if BRQ on is detected, the command unit 400 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball lending operation based on the lending request with EX set to on (tf7). The lending operation for lending is started (tf8).

  In this way, when a winning with payout of a prize ball occurs during execution of a lending operation, after the lending operation ends, BRDY on is detected, and a lending request may be detected again. Even during the execution of the lending control, the payout operation based on the payout request is executed with priority. In other words, if a prize with payout of a prize ball occurs during the execution of the lending control, the series of lending control is interrupted, the payout operation based on the payout request is executed, and the payout operation is terminated after the payout operation is completed. The lending control that had previously been resumed.

  FIG. 32 is a timing chart showing an operation situation when a lending process is performed by the card unit 400 when an operation of the ball lending switch 29 is detected during the award ball payout operation.

  Even if the payout control unit 61 turns on BRQ during the award ball payout operation, the payout operation is prioritized and waits until the payout operation ends. When the payout operation ends (tg1), the game control unit 41 is notified of the end of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request by setting the in-operation signal to off (tg2). At this time, if BRQ is detected to be on, EX is turned on to notify the card unit 400 of the start of a pachinko ball lending operation based on the lending request (tg3), and the number of lending unit balls is pachinko ball The lending operation for lending is started (tg4).

  The payout control unit 61 performs the lending control based on the lending request when the lending request is always detected regardless of the control state of the game control unit 41 except during the period during which the award ball is being paid out. Is possible. That is, it is possible to receive a pachinko ball even while the game is running.

  In FIG. 33, when the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is detected and take-in control (take-in control process described later) is performed, the operation of the check-out switch 10 is detected, and the check-out control ( It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition at the time of the payment control process mentioned later being performed.

  When the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively detected (th1), the game control unit 41 invalidates the detection of the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the checkout switch 10. To do. When the capture control based on the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is completed (th2), the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is enabled and the specified number according to the gaming state If the number of bets is not yet set, that is, if the number of pachinko balls taken is less than the number required to set the prescribed number, the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is operated. Enable detection of. In addition, when the take-in control based on the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is finished (th2), if a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state are set, The detection of the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled.

  When the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected effectively (th1), the game control unit 41 invalidates the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10. Further, if a specified number of bets are set according to the gaming state and the detection of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, the detection of the operation of the start switch 7 is also invalidated. When the settlement control based on the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is completed (th2), the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is enabled and the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. To enable.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the capture control is performed based on the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, or the settlement control is performed based on the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10, Until these capture control and settlement control are completed, detection of each operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated.

  FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are timing charts showing an operation state when the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 is disconnected during the BET process.

  As shown in FIG. 34, when the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 is cut off and VL cannot be detected (ti1), the payout control unit 61 prohibits the loan control and connects the card unit. The game control unit 41 is notified that the middle signal is off and the card unit 400 is not connected. When the game control unit 41 detects that the card unit connection signal is off and confirms that it is not connected to the card unit 400, the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is invalidated. The capture control based on the detection of the operation of the capture switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited. Then, an error code indicating that the card unit 400 is not connected to the slot machine 1 is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 to notify the connection error.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 35, when the game control unit 41 detects the off of the card unit connection signal during the capture control and the settlement control (tj1), At the time when the control and the settlement control are finished (tj2), the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are invalidated with the execution of the capture control and the settlement control is continuously invalidated. The game auxiliary display 12 displays an error code indicating that the card unit 400 is not connected to the slot machine 1 while prohibiting the capture control based on the detection of the operation of the ball capture switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6. Announce a connection error.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34, when the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 is restored and VL is detected ON (ti2), the payout control unit 61 permits the prohibited loan control. The game control unit 41 is notified that the card unit connection signal is on and the card unit 400 is connected. When the game control unit 41 detects that the card unit connection signal is on and confirms that it is connected to the card unit 400, the detection of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is enabled and the take-in control is permitted. To do. Then, the notification of the connection error is canceled.

  It should be noted that the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 is cut off in a state where a specified number of bets corresponding to the game state has already been set, and the game control unit 41 detects the off of the card unit connection signal. Even if it is confirmed that the card unit 400 is not connected, the detection of the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and even when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in such a state, the game is effectively started. That is, if a specified number of bets according to the game state have already been set and the game start condition is satisfied, the start switch is always set regardless of the connection state between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60. The game can be effectively started based on the detection of the operation 7. In addition, even if the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 is broken and the game control unit 41 detects that the card unit connection signal is off and confirms that the card unit 400 is not connected, the checkout switch The detection of the operation 10 is effective, and even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected in such a state, the settlement control is effectively performed. That is, regardless of the connection state between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60, it is possible to always perform the payment control based on the detection of the operation of the payment switch 10.

  FIG. 36 is a timing chart showing an example of a lighting state of the remaining sphere notification LED 114.

  First, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), for example, the pachinko balls in the upper plate 26 and the take-in preparation ball passage 110 are removed by operating the ball removal lever 31, and then the opening / closing shutter 122 is closed to play the game. When the control unit 41 detects a transition from on to off of the detection signal from the open / close shutter detection switch 123 (tk1), if the remaining sphere detection switch 113 is on at that time, the remaining sphere notification LED 114 is turned on. That is, when a pachinko ball remains in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 when the ball release lever 31 is operated, the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned on and at least one ball is in the take-in preparation ball passage 110. The pachinko sphere is informed.

  In addition, when the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is detected (tk2) in a state where the remaining ball notification LED 114 is lit, the remaining ball detection switch 113 is turned on, that is, the take-in Even if pachinko balls remain in the preparation ball passage 110, the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36B, for example, the remaining ball detection switch 113 is on, that is, a pachinko ball remains in the take-in preparation ball passage 110, but the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned off. In some cases, the game control unit 41 executes the settlement request process with the settlement request signal turned on if there is a captured ball at the time when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (tm1). Next, after the payout control unit 61 starts the payout control process and sets the in-operation signal to on, the game control unit 41 sets the settlement request signal to off based on the fact that the in-operation signal is turned off and the payout control process is ended. If the remaining sphere detection switch 113 is in the on state at the time (tm2), the remaining sphere notification LED 114 is turned on to notify that at least one pachinko ball remains in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110. .

  Thereafter, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected and the return operation of the capture device 100 is started (tm3), the remaining sphere detection switch 113 is in an off state at the time when the return operation is completed (tm4), that is, When all the pachinko balls remaining in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 are not returned by the return operation, the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned off. If the remaining sphere detection switch 113 is on at the time when the return operation is completed (tm4), the remaining sphere notification LED 114 is lit as it is.

  In other words, the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned on if the ball removal lever 31 is operated or a pachinko ball remains in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 after the settlement request process or the return operation in the settlement control process is completed. When the pachinko ball does not remain in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 after completion of the return operation in the settlement control process, or an operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is detected during the BET process. Turn off in case.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs the startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the game control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the activation processing in the CPU 91a of the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 and the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 is completed, and communication with the game control unit 41 is completed. The reset signal is input for a period longer than the time until the state becomes possible. That is, at the time when the game control unit 41 finishes the activation process and shifts to a normal process, the payout control unit 61 and the effect control unit 91 are waiting in a state where communication with the game control unit 41 is possible. It becomes.

  In the startup process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, I / O port 41d, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and the voltage drop signal Is determined, that is, whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2). When the voltage drop signal is input, except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input Then, the process proceeds to a loop process in which neither process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, and a specific register of the CPU 41a is acquired. The valid / invalid of the stop function is set in (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the RAM 41c (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the RAM 41c (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 38, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sa101), and the error code set in the RAM 41c is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sa102). .

  Next, the error code set in the RAM 41c is confirmed, it is determined whether the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sa103), and an error code indicating an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error is set. If it is determined that the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormality error, the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed except for the determination.

  If an error code indicating a non-RAM error is set in step Sa103, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sa104). If no operation is detected, it is further determined whether or not an operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sa105). If no operation of the reset switch 23 is detected, the process returns to step Sa104. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sa104, or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sa105, the error code set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa106). ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in step Sa101 (Sa107), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 37, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the data for failure diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12), and each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, the state stored in the stack (Sa13).

  Next, the value of the unpaid ball counter (a counter that stores the number of unpaid balls that have not been paid out of the number of payout requests based on the payout request) set in the RAM 41c is acquired, and the value of the unpaid ball counter is 0. Whether the unpaid ball based on the payout request remains (Sa14). If the unpaid ball counter value is 0, the unpaid ball counter (settlement) set in the RAM 41c is further determined. The value of a counter that stores the number of unsettled spheres that have not yet been paid out of the number of settlement requests based on the request is acquired, and whether or not the value of the unsettled sphere counter is 0, that is, the unsettled sphere based on the settlement request is It is determined whether or not it remains (Sa15). If the value of the unsettled ball counter is 0, the interruption is permitted (Sa16), and the process returns to the last process before power interruption.

  If the value of the unpaid ball counter is not 0 in the step of Sa14, that is, if an unpaid ball based on the payout request remains, interrupt is permitted (Sa17), and the top of the payout request process described later ( The process proceeds to step Se101 in FIG. If the value of the unsettled sphere counter is not 0 in step Sa15, that is, if the unsettled sphere based on the settlement request remains, the interruption is permitted (Sa18), and the top of the settlement request processing described later ( The process proceeds to step Sb201 in FIG.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in step Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa19), The value stored in the set value work (0 at this time) is corrected to 1 (Sa20). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa21), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 39, ie, the setting change mode is entered (Sa22). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 39, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sa201).

  Thereafter, the operation enters a state of waiting for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sa202, Sa203). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sa202, the set value read in the step of Sa201. 1 (Sa204), it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sa205). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in steps Sa202 and Sa203 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sa205, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sa206) ) Again, the reset / setting switch 38 in the steps of Sa202 and Sa203 Returns to the state of the detection waiting for the operation of Tosuitchi 7.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in step Sa203, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sa207). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sa208). If it is determined in step Sa208 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 37 and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether or not the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to an abnormal error process. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  Further, in the starting process, when the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal, it is determined whether or not the value of the unpaid ball counter or the unpaid ball counter is 0, and the unpaid ball counter or the unpaid ball is determined. When the value of the counter is not 0, that is, when an unpaid ball based on the payout request or an unpaid ball based on the checkout request remains, the process proceeds to the top of the payout request process or the checkout request process. Then, in the payout request process and the checkout request process, as will be described later, a pachinko ball payout request for the value of the unpaid ball counter or an unpaid request for the value of the unpaid ball counter is performed. If the power is interrupted during the payout request process or the checkout request process, and unpaid balls or unsettled balls remain at the time of the power failure, a payout request for unpaid or a checkout request for the unsettled payment will be made again at the time of restoration. This is done, and the unpaid or unpaid portion of the pachinko ball will be paid out.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sa301), an internal lottery process (Sa302), a reel rotation process (Sa303), a reel stop process (Sa304), a winning determination process (Sa305), a prize ball grant process (Sa306), and a game end process (Sa307) are executed in order, and when the game end process is completed, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sa301, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in the step of Sa302, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step of Sa301, and winning in each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in step Sa303, a process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is executed. In this reel rotation process, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate at a constant speed.

  In the reel stop process in the step of Sa304, the player's operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, and the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the fact that the stop condition of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is established. Execute the process to stop the rotation.

  In the winning determination process in the step of Sa305, when it is determined in the step of Sa304 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the prize ball granting process in the step of Sa306, when it is determined in the step of Sa305 that the winning is determined, a process for requesting payout of pachinko balls corresponding to the number of prize balls given in accordance with the winning is performed.

  In the game end process in the step of step Sa307, a process for setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sa301.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sb1), and it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Sb2). If a replay game flag indicating that a replay game is in progress is set in the RAM 41c and it is determined that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1, and the bet set in the RAM 41c is set. Specified number of numbers (explained later, this is the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state, and is set to 1 when in the regular bonus, and 3 when in the normal gaming state and the small role game. However, the process (Sb3, Sb4) for determining whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number is referred to in the step of Sb4. The process is repeated until it is determined that the value of the BET counter is the specified number, and it is determined in step Sb4 that the value of the BET counter is the specified number. Been if waits detection standby state of operation of the start switch 7 (Sb5). If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in this state, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the game is not a replay game in step Sb2, whether or not the detection signal of the open / close shutter detection switch 123 has transitioned from on to off, that is, the ball removal lever 31 is operated and the upper plate 26 is moved. It is determined whether or not the ball has been removed (Sb6). If the detection signal of the open / close shutter detection switch 123 has transitioned from on to off, the detection is based on the input state of the detection signal from the remaining ball detection switch 113. It is determined whether or not a remaining ball in the included preparation ball passage 110 is detected (Sb7). If a remaining sphere in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 is detected, the remaining sphere notification LED 114 is turned on (Sb8), a notification is made to prompt the user to operate the checkout switch 10, and then the processing of Sb9 is performed. move on. Further, when the detection signal of the open / close shutter detection switch 123 does not transition from on to off in the step Sb6, or when the remaining sphere in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 is not detected in the step Sb7, it remains as it is. The process proceeds to Sb9.

  In step Sb9, it is determined whether or not the card unit connecting signal on is detected, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 is connected to the payout control board 60.

  If the card unit connection signal on is detected in step Sb9, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sb10). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. Then, the process proceeds to the settlement control process shown in FIG. 42 (Sb11), and when the settlement control process ends, the process returns to the step Sb6. Further, when the process proceeds to the settlement control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Sb10, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Sb12), and the BET counter If the value of is a specified number, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 is detected (Sb13). If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb6 and the start switch 7 is turned on. If an operation is detected, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, detection of operations of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the checkout switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a prescribed number in step Sb12, it is determined whether or not an operation of the one-ball intake switch 5 has been detected (Sb14), and an operation of the one-ball intake switch 5 has been detected. For example, the value of the fetched ball counter set in the RAM 41c (a counter that stores the fetched ball number that is not yet fetched among the number of balls to be fetched) is updated to 1 (Sb15). Then, the process proceeds to the capture control process shown in FIG. 44 (Sb16), and when the capture control process ends, the process returns to the step Sb6. Further, when the process shifts to the capture control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  In step Sb14, if the operation of the one-ball take-in switch is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected (Sb17). If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected. Returning to the step of Sb6, if the operation of MAXBET6 is detected, the value of the take-in ball counter is (the specified number × 5−the value of the BET counter × 5−the unused ball counter (the counter set in the RAM 41c). The counter is updated to the value of a counter that stores the number of unused balls that have already been taken in but have not yet been used for setting the number of bets (Sb18). In other words, the value of the take-in ball counter is determined from the take-in request ball number instructed by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 and the used ball number that has already been used for setting the bet number and the unused ball number that has not been used for setting the bet number yet. Update the value by subtracting the number of balls. Then, the process proceeds to the capture control process shown in FIG. 44 (Sb16), and when the capture control process ends, the process returns to the step Sb6. Further, when the process shifts to the capture control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  In step Sb9, if the card unit connection signal on is not detected, an error code indicating a connection error indicating that the card unit 400 is not normally connected to the slot machine 1 is set ( Sb19). When the error code is set, the error code is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 and a connection error is notified outside the gaming machine. Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sb20). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the process proceeds to the settlement control process shown in FIG. 42 (Sb11), and the settlement control process is performed. When is finished, the process returns to the step Sb6. Further, when the process proceeds to the settlement control process, the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated until the process ends.

  If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in step Sb20, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Sb21). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the operation of the start switch 7 is performed. Is detected (Sb22), and if the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, detection of operations of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the checkout switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated.

  If the value of the BET counter is not a prescribed number in the step Sb21, or if the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step Sb22, whether or not the card unit connection signal on is detected, that is, the card It is determined whether or not the unit 400 and the payout control board 60 are in a connected state (Sb23). If on of the card unit connection signal is not detected, the process directly returns to the step of Sb6, and the card unit connection signal If on is detected, the error code indicating the connection error set in step Sb19 is cleared (Sb24), and the process returns to step Sb6. Accordingly, the display of the error code displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is also released.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sb11.

  In the settlement control process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 0 (Sb101). If the value of the unused ball counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 ( Sb102).

  If neither the value of the unused ball counter or the value of the BET counter is 0 in the steps of Sb101 and Sb102, the value of the unsettled ball counter is set to (the value of the unused ball counter + the value of the BET counter × 5 ), That is, the total value of the number of unused balls and the number of used balls (Sb103), and the values of the unused ball counter and the BET counter are cleared (Sb104). Then, the process proceeds to the settlement request process shown in FIG. 43 (Sb105). When the settlement request process is completed, the input state of the detection signal of the remaining sphere detection switch 113 is confirmed, and the remaining sphere in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 is detected. (Sb106), and if the remaining balls in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 are not detected, the settlement control process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If a remaining ball in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 is detected in step Sb106, the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned on (Sb107), and a notification for prompting the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed, and then the settlement control is performed. The process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the unused ball counter value and the BET counter value are both 0 in the steps of Sb101 and Sb102, it is determined whether the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, that is, the return ball in the return ball guide passage 109. (Sb108), if the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, in the payout ball guiding passage 208. It is determined whether or not the payout ball is clogged (Sb109). If the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected in the step of Sb108 or the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the step of Sb109, the settlement control process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If neither the return ball clogging detection switch 111 nor the dispensing ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected in the steps of Sb108 and Sb109, the rotational drive amount of the take-in motor 101 is set to 100 balls (Sb110), and the sorting solenoid 102 is turned on (Sb111), and the flow direction of the captured pachinko sphere is set to the return ball guiding passage 109 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Sb112). If the actual flow path direction is on the return ball guiding passage 109 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned on and the take-in operation is started (Sb113). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the drive of the take-in motor 101 is performed on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the return ball guide path 109 side. To start.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the return ball guiding path 109 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is on (Sb114). ) If the flow path direction is on the return ball guiding passage 109 side, it is determined whether or not the drive stop condition for the take-in motor 101 is satisfied (Sb115 to Sb118). Specifically, in the step of Sb115, the detection status of the first capture ball detection switch 104 and the second capture ball detection switch 105 is checked, and the capture is performed for a specified time (eg, 3 seconds) after the last capture ball is detected. It is determined whether or not an incoming ball has been detected, and it is determined whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 has been detected in step Sb116, that is, whether or not the return ball has been clogged in the return ball guide passage 109. In the step Sb117, it is determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, whether or not the payout ball is clogged in the payout ball guide passage 208. In the step Sb118, the rotation drive is performed. It is determined whether or not the rotation for 100 balls has been completed.

  If none of the conditions for stopping the driving of the take-in motor 101 is established in steps Sb115 to Sb118, the process returns to step Sb114. Further, when any one of the drive conditions of the take-in motor 101 is established in the steps Sb115 to Sb118, that is, when the take-in ball has not been detected for a specified time since the last take-in ball was detected. When the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, when the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected or when rotation for 100 balls is completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off ( Sb119), the flow direction of the pachinko ball taken in with the sorting solenoid 102 turned off is taken as the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side (Sb120).

  Next, an input state of a detection signal from the remaining sphere detection switch 113 is confirmed to determine whether or not a remaining sphere in the take-in preparation sphere passage 110 is detected (Sb121). If the remaining sphere is not detected, the remaining sphere notification LED 114 is turned off (Sb122), the settlement control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If a remaining ball in the take-in preparation ball passage 110 is detected in step Sb121, the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned on (Sb123), and a notification for prompting the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed, and then the settlement control is performed. The process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Further, when the flow path direction is not on the return ball guiding passage 109 side in the step Sb112 or Sb 114, that is, the flow switching valve is switched to the return ball guiding passage 109 side with the sorting solenoid 102 turned on. When the flow direction by 107 is not switched to the return ball guide passage 109 side, or while the take-in motor 101 is being driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the on state, and the flow direction is at the return ball guide passage 109 side. In spite of this, when the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Sb124), and the sorting solenoid 102 is turned off. After setting (Sb125), after setting an error code indicating a channel direction abnormality error indicating a channel direction abnormality (Sb126). The processing shifts to error processing shown in FIG. 38 (Sb127). Then, when the error state is canceled and the error process is finished, the settlement control process is finished, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement request process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sb105.

  In the settlement request processing, first, it is determined whether or not the payout control board connection confirmation signal is on, that is, whether or not the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are connected (Sb201), and the payout control board. If ON of the connection confirmation signal is not detected, an error code indicating a payout control board connection error indicating that the payout control board 60 is not normally connected is set (Sb202), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. (Sb203). When the error state is canceled and the error process is completed, the process returns to the step Sb201.

  If the payout control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in step Sb201, the value of the ball count signal is updated to the value of the unsettled ball counter (Sb204), and the error determination timer counter set in the RAM 41c is updated. An initial value is set in (counter for counting payout communication error determination time) (Sb205), and a settlement request signal is turned on (Sb206).

  Next, the output status of the operating signal is monitored until the on signal of the operating signal is detected (Sb207 to Sb209). In step Sb208, it is determined whether a payout communication error determination time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, that is, whether the error determination timer counter is 0, and the payout communication error determination time has elapsed. In other words, if the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the checkout request cannot be confirmed even after the payout communication error determination time has elapsed since the checkout request is made, there is an abnormality associated with the payout on the payout control board 60 side. A payout communication error code indicating the occurrence is set (Sb209), and the process returns to step Sb207 again. Along with this, an error code indicating that an abnormality has occurred on the payout control board 60 side is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  Next, in step Sb207, when the on-operation signal is detected, that is, when the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request is confirmed, the in-operation signal is detected until the off-operation signal is detected. Are monitored (Sb210 to Sb214). In step Sb210, the detection status of the payout ball detection switch 202 is checked to determine whether or not a payout ball is detected. If a payout ball is detected, the value of the unsettled ball counter is set to 1. Subtract (Sb212) and return to step Sb210 again. In step Sb213, it is determined whether the payout communication error determination time has elapsed, that is, whether the error determination timer counter is 0 (Sb213). If the payout communication error determination time has elapsed, That is, if the end of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payment request cannot be confirmed even after the payment communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payment request is made, an error code indicating the above-mentioned payout communication error is set ( Sb214), it returns to the step of Sb210 again. Accordingly, as described above, an error code indicating that an abnormality associated with payout has occurred on the payout control board 60 side is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  Next, in step Sb211, when an off-operation signal is detected, that is, when it is confirmed that the pachinko ball payout operation has been completed based on the settlement request, whether or not an error code indicating a payout communication error is set. (Sb215), and if the error code indicating the payout communication error is not set, the unsettled ball counter value is cleared regardless of whether the unsettled ball counter value remains ( Sb217), the settlement request signal is turned off (Sb218), the settlement request processing is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If an error code indicating a payout communication error is set in step Sb215, the error code is cleared (Sb216). In other words, even if the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payment request is made and the error state is controlled, when the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request is confirmed, the error state is automatically Has been released. Accordingly, the display of the error code displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is also released. Then, regardless of whether or not the value of the unsettled sphere counter remains, after clearing the value of the unsettled sphere counter (Sb217), the settlement request signal is turned off (Sb218), and the settlement request process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the capture control process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sb23.

  In the take-in control process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining sphere notification LED 114 is lit, that is, whether or not notification for prompting the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed (Sb301). If it is lit, the player is willing to play the game at this point, and the remaining ball notification LED 114 is turned off (Sb302), assuming that notification for prompting the operation of the settlement switch 10 is unnecessary.

  Then, 3 is set in the retry counter (counter for storing the retry count of the take-in operation) set in the RAM 41c (Sb303), and the rotational drive amount of the take-in motor 101 according to the value of the take-in ball counter, that is, A rotational drive amount necessary for taking in the number of balls set to the take-in ball counter is set (Sb304). In this state, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is in the state facing the intake ball guiding path 108 side.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state (Sb305). If the actual flow path direction is based on the take-in ball guiding passage 108 side, the take-in motor 101 is set to on and the take-in operation is started (Sb306). That is, based on the detection state of the flow path detection switch 115 that detects the flow path direction of the flow path switching valve 107, the condition of the intake motor 101 is determined on the condition that the actual flow path direction faces the intake ball guide passage 108 side. Start driving.

  While the intake motor 101 is being driven, it is determined whether or not the actual flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 is on the intake ball guiding path 108 side, that is, whether or not the flow path detection switch 115 is in an off state ( Sb307), if the flow path direction is on the intake ball guide passage 108 side, the detection status of the first intake ball detection switch 104 and the second intake ball detection switch 105 is checked, and whether or not the intake ball is detected. Is determined (Sb308).

  If a captured ball is detected in step Sb308, the value of the captured ball counter is decremented by 1, and the value of the unused ball counter is incremented by 1 (Sb309). At this time, the number of captured balls displayed on the captured / paid-in ball display 11 is also incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the unused ball counter is 5, that is, whether or not the number of balls necessary to set the bet number is 1 (Sb310). If the value of the unused ball counter is less than 5, Sb307 Return to the step. If the value of the unused ball counter is 5 in the step of Sb310, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 and the value of the unused ball counter is cleared (Sb311), and the process returns to the step of Sb307.

  Further, if the take-in ball is not detected in step Sb308, it is determined whether or not the take-in motor 101 is on, that is, whether or not the take-in motor 101 is still being driven (Sb312). If 101 is on, it is determined whether or not the rotation for the rotational drive amount, that is, the value of the take-in ball counter has been completed (Sb313), and if the rotation for the rotational drive amount has not been completed, the process proceeds to Sb307. Returning to the step, if the rotation for the rotation drive amount is completed, the setting of the take-in motor 101 is turned off (Sb314), and the process returns to the step Sb307.

  Further, if the take-in motor 101 is not on in the step of Sb312, the pachinko ball taken in by the rotation of the take-in motor 101 after the take-in motor 101 is turned off is detected by the second take-in ball detection switch 105. It is determined whether or not a detection waiting time that is a time required for detection has elapsed (Sb315). If the detection waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to the step of Sb307.

  If the detection waiting time has elapsed in step Sb315, whether or not the value of the take-in ball counter is 0, that is, the number of balls requested by operating the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is taken in. (Sb316), and if the value of the take-in ball counter is not 0, that is, if the number of balls requested by the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 has not been taken in, It is determined whether or not the retry counter value is 0, that is, whether or not the capture operation for capturing the shortage of pachinko balls has been performed for the number of retries (Sb317). If the retry counter value is not 0, The retry counter value is decremented by 1 (Sb318), and the process returns to Sb304.

  If the value of the take-in ball counter is 0 in step Sb316, the retry counter value is cleared (Sb319), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the value of the retry counter is 0 in step Sb317, the value of the take-in ball counter is cleared (Sb320), the take-in control process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Further, in the step of Sb305 or the step of Sb308, when the flow path direction is not on the intake ball guide passage 108 side, that is, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path direction is on the intake ball guide passage 108 side. In spite of this, when the flow path direction by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide passage 109 or when the take-in motor 101 is driven, the sorting solenoid 102 is in the off state, and the flow path If the direction of the flow path by the flow path switching valve 107 faces the return ball guide path 109 side even though the direction is the intake ball guide path 108 side, the setting of the intake motor 101 is set to off ( Sb321) After clearing the values of the retry counter and the take-in ball counter (Sb322), an error code indicating a channel direction error indicating a channel direction error is set. (Sb323), and proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. 38 (Sb324), the error state is canceled, the error processing is completed, and ends the capture control processing, returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. 41.

  As described above, in the BET process, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effectively detected, the process proceeds to the settlement control process, and when the number of bets of 1 or more has already been set or the value of the unused ball counter is not 0. In this case, that is, when the taken-in ball remains, a settlement request is performed, and a settlement request process for returning the captured ball to the player is performed based on the settlement request, and then the settlement control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of bets is not set and the value of the unused ball counter is 0, the flow direction of the pachinko ball taken in by the take-in device 100 is set to the return ball guide passage 109 side. After the take-in motor 101 is driven in the state, control for returning the pachinko balls in the take-in device 100 is performed, and then the settlement control process is terminated.

  Also, in the settlement request process, even if the dispensing communication error determination time elapses from the time when the settlement request is made, the operation signal off is not detected, that is, the end of the pachinko ball dispensing operation based on the settlement request is confirmed. If it cannot, the payout communication error flag is set and controlled to an error state. The error state is automatically canceled when the on-operation signal is detected to confirm the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payment request.

  Further, when the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5 is detected effectively, 1 is set in the take-in ball counter and the process proceeds to the take-in control process. The value of the capture ball counter obtained by subtracting the capture operation of the motion amount for capturing the ball by detecting the captured ball by the first capture ball detection switch 104 and the second capture ball detection switch 105 becomes 0. Or the retry counter that is subtracted every time the capture operation is performed is 0 until either condition is satisfied, and either condition is satisfied, the capture control Processing ends.

  When the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected effectively, the number of used balls (the value of the BET counter × the number of balls used to set a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state (15 balls)) 5) and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of unused balls (the value of the unused ball counter), that is, the number of balls necessary to set the specified number of bets at that time is set in the take-in ball counter and loaded. The process proceeds to the control process, and the take-in operation for taking in the pachinko balls corresponding to the value of the take-in ball counter is subtracted by detecting the taken-in balls by the first take-in ball detection switch 104 and the second take-in ball detection switch 105 Either until the value of the taken-in ball counter becomes 0 or the value of the retry counter that is subtracted every time the take-in operation is performed becomes 0, until either of the conditions is met. The capture control process ends when one of the conditions is met That.

  45 to 47 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sa302.

  In the internal lottery process, first, a random number acquisition process whose details will be described later is performed (Sc1). In this random number acquisition process, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired based on a random number generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown).

  Then, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is read (Sc2), and whether or not the read set value is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the read set value is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the RAM 41c (Sc4), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the set value read in the step of Sc4 is in the range of 1 to 6, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (Sc5), and if it is the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state Correspondingly, the small combination and re-game combination are read out in the order registered in the winning combination table according to gaming state shown in FIG. 14A (Sc6). The BET number (the number of bets) set in the step of Sd1 is read, and the common flag of the combination corresponding to the combination and the combination of the read BET number in FIG. The setting status is acquired (Sc7). As a result, it is determined whether the common flag is set for the combination and the BET number (Sc8).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored at the address registered in the role-specific table for the small combination and re-playing combination in FIG. (Sc9). Then, the process proceeds to Sc11. If the common flag is not set, the number of judgment values stored at the address registered in the role-specific table for the small combination and re-playing combination corresponding to the set value read for the combination and the BET number Obtain (Sc10). Then, the process proceeds to Sc11.

  In the step of Sc11, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sc9 or Sc10 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the value of the random number for internal lottery (Sc12). If an overflow occurs, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sc13). Then, the process proceeds to Sc15 shown in FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sc12, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not been processed yet among the small combination and re-playing combination defined for the normal gaming state (Sc14). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the process of Sc6, and processing is continued with the next combination from the small combination and re-game combination determined for the normal gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the process proceeds to Sc15 shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sc15, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus or big bonus winning flag has already been set in the RAM 41c in the previous game, and it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag. If the winning flag for the regular bonus or the big bonus has already been set, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If neither the regular bonus winning flag nor the big bonus winning flag is set, the random number for internal lottery is returned to the value before addition, that is, the value acquired in the random number acquisition process of Sc1 (Sc16).

  Next, with reference to the winning combination table according to gaming state shown in FIG. 14 (a) and the special role combination table shown in FIG. 14 (c), lottery of the normal gaming state registered in the winning combination table according to gaming state The target special combination is read out in the order registered in the special role combination table (Sc17). At this time, if the special role lose is registered in the special role-specific table, the special role loses are also read in the registered order. Furthermore, the setting state of the common flag is acquired from the role-specific table for special roles in FIG. 14C (Sc18). As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination (Sc19).

  If the common flag is set, the number of judgment values stored in the address registered in the special role-specific table of FIG. 14C for the role is acquired (Sc20). Then, the process proceeds to Sc22. If the common flag is not set, the number of judgment values stored in the address registered in the special role-specific table corresponding to the set value read for the corresponding role is acquired (Sc21). Then, the process proceeds to Sc22.

  In the step of Sc22, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sc20 or Sc21 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sc23). If an overflow occurs, it is determined whether or not the combination is a loss A or a loss B (Sc24). If the combination is either Loss-A or Loss-B, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the winning combination is neither Loss A nor Losing B, the winning flag for the winning combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sc25). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sc23, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been processed (Sc26). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the process of Sc17, and the processing continues with the next combination from the special combination (including the special combination lost) determined for the normal gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Sc5, if the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is a small role game (Sc27). If it is a small role game, corresponding to the small role game, the combinations registered in the winning combination table according to gaming state in FIG. 14A are sequentially read (Sc28), and the process proceeds to Sc30. If it is not a small role game in the step of Sc27, since it is a regular bonus, the combinations registered in the winning combination table according to the gaming state in FIG. 14A corresponding to the regular bonus are sequentially read (Sc29), and Sc30. Proceed to the process.

  In the step of Sc30, it is determined whether or not the type of the combination read in the steps of Sc28 and Sc29 is regular bonus (2) or JACIN. In the case of regular bonus (2) or JACIN, whether the winning flag of regular bonus (2) has already been set in the RAM 41c in the previous game or not, and it is determined whether it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag (Sc31). If the type of the read combination is neither regular bonus (2) nor JACIN, the process proceeds to Sc32.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus (2) has already been set, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 40 (Regular bonus (2) and JACIN are selected by game state as described above). Since it is registered after the small role in the table, the internal lottery process is completed.) Even if the type of the read combination is regular bonus (2) or JACIN, if the winning flag for regular bonus (2) is not set, the process proceeds to Sc32.

  In the step of Sc32, the BET number (the number of bets) set in the step of Sd1 is further read, and the combination corresponding to the combination and the read BET number is read from the corresponding combination table of FIGS. 14B and 14C. Get the setting status of the common flag. As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination and the BET number (Sc33).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored at the address registered in the corresponding role-specific table in FIGS. 14B and 14C is acquired for the role and the BET number (Sc34). . Then, the process proceeds to Sc36. If the common flag is not set, the determination stored in the address registered in the corresponding role table shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C corresponding to the setting value read for the role and the BET number. The number of values is acquired (Sc35). Then, the process proceeds to Sc36.

  In the step of Sc36, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sc34 or Sc35 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sc37). If an overflow occurs, the winning flag for the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sc38). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sc37, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined for the gaming state (Sc39). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the process of Sc27, and the processing is continued with the next combination determined for the gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the internal lottery process, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is an appropriate value. An error code indicating an error is set, and the process proceeds to error processing. As in the case where it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become.

  Also, in the normal gaming state, since the random number for the same internal lottery is drawn separately for the small role and the re-playing role and the special role, the random number to be won in the normal gaming state A small combination (cherry and watermelon in this embodiment) and a special combination (in this embodiment, big bonuses (1) to (3)) may be won simultaneously.

  Next, the random number acquisition process in the step of Sc1 will be described in detail based on the flowchart of FIG. In the random number acquisition process, interrupts are first prohibited (Sc101). Next, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the value of the latched random number is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. The random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR (Sc102).

  Next, the lower byte value and upper byte value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41GR are exchanged with each other using the work area of the RAM 41c (Sc103). Next, the value of the random number stored in the general-purpose register 41GR is ORed with 8080h (Sc104). Further, the upper byte (15th to 8th bits) is shifted downward by 1 bit, and 1 is inserted into the empty 15th bit. At this time, the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR is acquired as a random number for internal lottery and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc105). Then, after permitting the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sc101 (Sc106), the random number acquisition process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sa305.

  In the winning determination process, first, in correspondence with the current gaming state, the combinations registered as winning determination targets in the gaming state winning combination table of FIG. 14A are sequentially read (Sd1), and the read combination It is determined whether or not the combinations are aligned on the active line (Sd2). If the combination of the combination is not on the active line, the process proceeds to Sd4. If the combination of the combination is on the effective line, a winning flag indicating that the combination has won is set in the RAM 41c ( The processing proceeds to Sd3) and Sd4.

  In the step of Sd4, it is determined whether or not there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined as a winning determination target for the gaming state. If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the process of Sd1, and the process continues with the next combination registered in the winning combination table by gaming state as the processing target. If there is no combination not to be processed, the winning flag is referred to determine whether or not the replay has won (Sd5). If the replay has not won, the process proceeds to Sd7. If the replay has won, the replay is performed. A replay game in-progress flag indicating that a game is in progress is set in the RAM 41c (Sd6), and the process proceeds to Sd7.

  In step Sd7, it is determined whether or not the big bonus has been won by referring to the winning flag. If the big bonus has not been won, the process proceeds to Sd10. If the big bonus has been won, the big bonus is being determined. A big bonus medium flag indicating that it is present is set in the RAM 41c, the big bonus winning flag is cleared (Sd8), and the total number of paid-in pachinko balls (prize balls) in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c. The counter value is initialized (Sd9), and the process proceeds to Sd10.

  In step Sd10, the winning flag is referenced to determine whether or not the regular bonus has been won. If the regular bonus has not been won, the winning determination process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the regular bonus is won, a regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in effect is set in the RAM 41c, and the regular bonus winning flag is cleared (Sd11), and the number of regular bonus games is stored in the RAM 41c. After initializing the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored (Sd12), the winning determination process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the control content of the prize-ball giving process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sa306.

  In the winning ball awarding process, first, it is determined whether or not a winning with a winning ball is generated based on whether or not a winning flag is set (Se1), and a winning with a winning ball is generated. If not, the prize ball granting process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In addition, when a winning accompanied by awarding of a winning ball has occurred in the step of Se1, the number of winning balls awarded by the occurrence of the winning is determined as an unpaid-off ball counter (not determined based on a payout request). The counter is set to a payout ball number (Se2). Then, the process proceeds to the payout request process shown in FIG. 51. When the payout request process ends, the prize ball grant process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the control content of the payout request process executed by the CPU 41a in step Se3.

  In the payout request process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout control board connection confirmation signal “on” is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board 40 and the payout control board 60 are connected (Se101), and the payout control board. If the connection confirmation signal on is not detected, an error code indicating a payout control board connection error indicating that the payout control board 60 is not normally connected is set (Se102), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. When the error state is canceled and the error process is completed, the process returns to the step of Se101.

  If the payout control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in step Se101, the value of the ball signal is updated to the value of the unpaid ball counter (Se104), and the error determination timer counter described above is set to the initial value. Is set (Se105), and the payout request signal is turned on (Se106).

  Subsequently, the output state of the operating signal is monitored until the on signal of the operating signal is detected (Se107 to Se109). In step Se108, it is determined whether a payout communication error determination time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, that is, whether the error determination timer counter is 0, and the payout communication error determination time has elapsed. In other words, if the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request cannot be confirmed even after the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payout request is made, the error code indicating the payout communication error described above is set. (Se109), the process returns to the step of Se107 again. Accordingly, as described above, an error code indicating that an abnormality associated with payout has occurred on the payout control board 60 side is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  Next, in the step of Se107, when the operation signal on is detected, that is, when the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request is confirmed, the operation signal is output until the operation signal off is detected. Is output (Se110 to Se115). In the step of Se110, it is determined whether or not a payout ball is detected by checking the detection status of the payout ball detection switch 202. If a payout ball is detected, the value of the unpaid ball counter is set to 1. Subtracted (Se112) and the number of paid-in balls displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11 is (the number of winning balls−the value of the unpaid-off ball counter), that is, the number of winning balls at that time. The number of balls already paid out is updated (Se113), and the process returns to the step of Se110 again. Further, in the step of Se114, it is determined whether or not the payout communication error determination time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the error determination timer counter is 0 (Se114), and if the payout communication error determination time has elapsed, That is, if the end of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request cannot be confirmed even after the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payout request is made, an error code indicating the payout communication error described above is set ( Se115), the process returns to Se110 again. When the payout communication error flag is set, an error code indicating that an abnormality associated with payout has occurred on the payout control board 60 side is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as described above.

  Next, in the step of Se111, when the off-operation signal is detected, that is, when the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the payout communication error flag is set. When the error code indicating the payout communication error is set, the error code is cleared (Se117). In other words, even when the payout communication error determination time has elapsed from the time when the payout request is made and the error state is controlled, when the end of the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request is confirmed, the error state is automatically Has been released. Accordingly, the display of the error code displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is also released.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the unpaid ball counter is 0 (Se118). If the value of the unpaid ball counter is 0, the payout request signal is turned off (Se120), and the payout request process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the value of the unpaid ball counter is not 0 in the step of Se118, the unpaid ball counter value is cleared and the number of paid balls displayed on the taken-in / paid-off ball display 11 is displayed. The value is updated to the value of the number of winning balls (Se119). Then, the payout request signal is turned off (Se120), the payout request process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the prize ball giving process, when a prize accompanied by a prize ball is generated, a payout request process for making a payout request for the number of prize balls given by the prize is performed.

  In the payout request process, the payout ball is detected after the on-operation signal is detected until the off-operation signal is detected, that is, during the payout operation based on the payout request. Each time the value of the unpaid ball counter is subtracted and the value of the unpaid ball counter is subtracted, the number of paid balls displayed on the captured ball / paid ball indicator 11 is It is to be added.

  Also, in the payout request process, even if the payout communication error determination time elapses from the time when the payout request is made, if the operation signal off is not detected, that is, the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request is confirmed. If not, an error code indicating a payout communication error is set and controlled to an error state. The error state is automatically canceled when the on-operation signal is detected to confirm the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the control details of the game end time process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sa307.

  In the process at the end of the game, first, it is determined whether or not a bonus is in effect, that is, whether or not a regular bonus or a big bonus is in effect (Sf1). If the bonus is in progress, the values of various counters used in the bonus (the above-mentioned big bonus medium payout counter, regular bonus game number counter, regular bonus medium winning counter) are updated (Sf2). Proceed to processing.

  In step Sf3, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is not a replay game, the process proceeds to Sf5. If it is a replay game, the replay game in-progress flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared. (Sf4), the process proceeds to Sf5.

  In step Sf5, it is determined whether or not the game is in the big bonus. If the game is in the big bonus, whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, the total number of payouts in the big bonus is 2325 balls. (Sf6). If the big bonus is not in effect in step Sf5, or if the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sf6, the process proceeds to step Sf10 and step Sf6. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf7), and in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c, the initial stage for initializing the general work After performing Chemical Formula 2 (Sf8), the process proceeds to Sf9.

  In step Sf9, it is determined whether or not the game is in a regular bonus. If it is in a regular bonus, whether or not the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, the number of regular bonus games is 12 games. Or if the number of winnings in the regular bonus reaches 8 times, and if the regular bonus provided during the big bonus, whether the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 2325 balls, (Sf10), if the regular bonus is not in the step of Sf9, or if the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sf10, the process proceeds to the process of Sf12, and the end condition of the regular bonus in the step of Sf10 Is established in the RAM 41c. That regular bonus flag to clear the (Sf11), the process proceeds to Sf12.

  In step Sf12, it is determined whether or not the game state of the next game is a regular bonus. If the game state of the next game is a regular bonus, the specified value of the bet number set in the RAM 41c is set to 1 (Sf13). ), The process proceeds to Sf16. When the game state of the next game is not a regular bonus, that is, when the next game is a normal game state or a small role game in a big bonus, the specified value of the bet number set in the RAM 41c is set to 3 (Sf14), The process proceeds to Sf15.

  In step Sf15, after clearing the winning flags other than the special combination set in the RAM 41c, initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sf16). When finished, the flow returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  Next, the control contents of initialization 1 to 4 executed by the CPU 41a in response to the establishment of the initialization condition will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the control contents of initialization 1 executed by the CPU 41a before the transition to the setting change mode in the startup process.

  In initialization 1, first, the initialization table of the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address and initialization size registered corresponding to initialization 1 are read (Sg1). A pointer is set to the read start address (7E00 (H)) (Sg2). Next, the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer−7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sg3), and the number of bytes (1DM (H) + M) of the area to be initialized is set (Sg4). Then, a RAM clear process for clearing data from the start address set in Sg2 to the number of bytes set in Sg4 is executed (Sg5). When the RAM clear process is completed, the initialization 1 is completed. Return to.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the RAM clear process executed in step Sg5 of FIG.

  In the RAM clear process, 1-byte data indicated by the address indicated by the pointer is cleared to 0 (Sg101), and 1 is subtracted from the initialization byte number (the number of bytes set as an area to be initialized) (Sg102). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of initialized bytes after subtraction has become 0, that is, whether or not the initialization of all the specified number of bytes has been completed (Sg103). If the initialized byte number after subtraction is not 0, the pointer is advanced by 1 (Sg104), the process returns to Sg101, and the processes of Sg101-4 are repeated until the initialized byte number becomes 0. If the initialization byte number after subtraction in step Sg103 is 0, the initialization of all the specified number of bytes is completed, so the RAM clear process is terminated and the process returns to the original process. .

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the control content of initialization 2 executed by the CPU 41a at the end of the big bonus in the game end processing of Sa307.

  In the initialization 2, first, interrupts are prohibited (Sg21), and then the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 2 are read with reference to the initialization table of the ROM 41b (Sg22). In initialization 2, since two start addresses and initialization sizes corresponding to the two start addresses are registered, a pointer is set at the start address (7E28 (H)) of the area to be initialized first among the read start addresses. (Sg23), the number of bytes (67 (H)) of the area to be initialized first is set (Sg24), and the data is cleared from the start address set in Sg23 over the number of bytes set in Sg24. (See FIG. 54) is executed (Sg25). When the RAM clear process is completed, a pointer is set to the start address (7EBA (H)) of the second area to be initialized among the read start addresses (Sg26), and the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer− 7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sg27), and the number of bytes (118 (H) + M) of the second area to be initialized is set (Sg28). Then, a RAM clear process (see FIG. 54) for clearing data from the start address set in Sg26 to the number of bytes set in Sg28 is executed (Sg29). When the RAM clear process is completed, it is prohibited in the step of Sg21. The interrupt that has been made is permitted (Sg30), and the process returns to the original process even after the initialization 2 is completed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the control content of initialization 3 executed when the data in the RAM 41c is normal in the startup process by the CPU 41a.

  In the initialization 3, first, the initialization table of the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 3 are read (Sg31). Since two start addresses and initialization sizes corresponding to the two start addresses are registered in initialization 3, a pointer is set at the start address (7EB7 (H)) of the area to be initialized first among the read start addresses. (Sg32), the number of bytes (3 (H)) of the area to be initialized first is set (Sg33), and the RAM clear process for clearing the data from the start address set in Sg32 to the number of bytes set in Sg33 (See FIG. 54) is executed (Sg34). When the RAM clear process is completed, a pointer is set to the start address (7F05 (H)) of the second area to be initialized among the read start addresses (Sg35), and the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer− 7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sg36), and the number of bytes (CD (H) + M) of the second area to be initialized is set (Sg37). Then, a RAM clear process (see FIG. 54) for clearing data from the start address set in Sg35 over the number of bytes set in Sg37 is executed (Sg38). When the RAM clear process is completed, initialization 3 is completed. Return to the original process.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the control contents of initialization 4 executed for each game by the CPU 41a in the game end process of Sa307.

  In the initialization 4, first, interrupts are prohibited (Sg41), and then the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 4 are read with reference to the initialization table of the ROM 41b (Sg42). A pointer is set to the read start address (7F05 (H)) (Sg43). Next, the size (M = stack pointer−7FD2 (H)) of the unused stack area is calculated (Sg44), and the number of bytes (CD (H) + M) of the area to be initialized is set (Sg45). Then, a RAM clear process (see FIG. 54) for clearing data from the start address set in Sg43 over the number of bytes set in Sg45 is executed (Sg46). When the RAM clear process is completed, it is prohibited in the step of Sg41. The interrupt that has been made is permitted (Sg47), and the process returns to the original process even after the initialization 4 is completed.

  58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (A) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting and executing the activation process and the game process at intervals of about 0.56 ms. is there.

  In the timer interrupt process (A), first, interrupts are prohibited (Sh1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (A) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sh2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (A) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sh3). In the step of Sh3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (A) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sh4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is determined whether or not the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are starting or rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are starting or rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sh8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sh23 described later is executed (Sh5).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is 1 (ie, timer interrupt 2) by referring to the minute counter value (Sh6). If it is not timer interrupt 2 (ie, timer interrupt 1), the reel motor Reel start processing (Sh7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sh8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, a motor phase signal standby process (Sh9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has elapsed, and an intake motor control process (Sh10) for updating the rotational drive amount of the intake motor 101, etc. After sequential execution, the registers saved in the stack area in Sh2 are restored (Sh22), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sh1 step are permitted. (Sh23), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sh6, LED dynamic display processing (Sh11) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sh12), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sh13), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sh14), command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After sequentially executing the processing (Sh15) and the external output signal update processing (Sh16) for updating the external output signal, the register saved in the stack area in Sh2 is restored (Sh22), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sh1 are permitted. (Sh23) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sh4, it is further determined whether it is 3 by referring to the minute counter value, that is, whether it is timer interrupt 4 or not (Sh17). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sh 18) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of reels 2 L, 2 C, 2 R during constant speed rotation. Processing at the time of passing through the origin to be checked (Sh19), switch input determination processing (Sh20) for determining whether or not these various switches satisfy the detection conditions based on detection signals from various switches, and the same acquisition as the step of Sh10 After sequentially executing the motor control process (Sh21), the register saved in the stack area in Sh2 is restored (Sh22). Allow the ban to interrupt (Sh23), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sh17, the stop position is determined when the detection of the effective stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop is calculated is calculated. The number of steps until the stop calculated in the switch process (Sh42) and the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop, the stop process (Sh25) starts the brake by the two-phase excitation, and the brake is started in the stop process. After executing a final stop process (Sh26) for three-phase excitation after a certain period of time, the registers saved in the stack area in Sh2 are restored (Sh22), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sh1 are permitted ( Sh23), returning to the process before the interruption.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the command storage process executed when the CPU 41a generates a command in accordance with the progress of the game in the startup process and the game control process and stores it in the command queue.

  The command transmitted by the CPU 41a is composed of 2 bytes. The first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command content). Further, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. In this embodiment, the command is composed of a 2-byte signal, but these commands may be composed of a 1-byte signal or a 3-byte or more signal.

  In the command storing process, first, MODE and EXT composing a command to be transmitted are generated (Si1). Then, after storing the generated command in the area of the area number indicated by the storage pointer, that is, in the empty area of the command queue (Si2), 1 is added to the area number indicated by the storage pointer (Si3). Since the area number is a numerical value in the range of 0 to 15, when the serial number indicated by the storage pointer is 15, 1 is added and updated to 0 when it becomes 16.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the untransmitted flag is set (Si4). If the untransmitted flag is not set, the untransmitted flag is set (Si5). Then, it is determined whether or not the area number indicated by the storage pointer matches the area number indicated by the transmission pointer, that is, whether or not all areas of the command queue are filled with unsent commands. In this case, an unsent command stored in the command queue is transmitted, and waits until the area number indicated by the storage pointer does not match the area number indicated by the transmission pointer, and the area number indicated by the storage pointer and the transmission pointer are waited. The command storage process is terminated when the area number indicated by (2) does not match, that is, when the command queue becomes empty (Si6).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the command transmission process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (A) described above.

  In the command transmission process, first, it is determined whether or not the delay counter for setting the transmission delay time of the command is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the command is waiting for transmission of the command stored in the command queue (Sh101). ).

  If it is not waiting for transmission in Sh101, it is determined whether or not the aforementioned untransmitted flag indicating that an untransmitted command is stored in the command queue is set (Sh102). If the unsent flag is not set in Sh102, the command to be sent is not stored and the command sending process is terminated.

  Further, when the unsent flag is set in Sh102, that is, when an unsent command is stored in the command queue, a random number value randomly generated in the range of 0 to 15 is acquired from the random number counter ( Sh103), 2 is added to the acquired random number value to correct the value to 2 to 17, and set to the delay counter (Sh104).

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the delay counter value (Sh105), whether or not the delay counter value is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the transmission delay time of the command stored in the area indicated by the transmission pointer value of the command queue has elapsed, (Sh106), and if the delay counter value is greater than 0, that is, if the transmission delay time has not elapsed, the command transmission process is terminated.

  Further, when the delay counter value is 0 in the step of Sh106, that is, when the transmission delay time has elapsed, the command stored in the area indicated by the transmission pointer value of the command queue is transmitted to the effect control board 90 ( Sh107-Sh110). Specifically, first, MODE composing the command stored in the area indicated by the transmission pointer value of the command queue is output (Sh107), and a strobe signal for notifying the effect control unit 91 that the command is output is output for a predetermined time. (In this embodiment, 10 μs) is output (Sh108). Then, EXT constituting the command stored in the area indicated by the transmission pointer value is output (Sh109), and the strobe signal is output again for a predetermined time (Sh110).

  Next, 1 is added to the area number indicated by the transmission pointer (Sh111). Since the area number is a numerical value in the range of 0 to 15, when the area number indicated by the transmission pointer is 15, 1 is added and when it becomes 16, the area number is updated to 0.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the area number indicated by the transmission pointer matches the serial number indicated by the storage pointer, that is, whether or not the command to be transmitted is stored in the command queue (Sh112). Then, the non-transmission flag is cleared and the command transmission process is terminated (Sh113).

  If it is determined in Sh101 that the delay counter value is greater than 0, that is, it is in a transmission waiting state, the process proceeds to Sh105, and if the transmission delay time has elapsed, the command queue transmission pointer value indicates the area. The stored command is transmitted, and when an untransmitted command becomes empty, processing such as clearing the untransmitted flag is performed (Sh105 to Sh113), and the command transmission processing is terminated.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (B) executed by the CPU 41a by interrupting the start process or the game process in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 4, that is, at an interval of about 0.4 ms.

  In the timer interruption process (B), first, interruption is prohibited (Sh51). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (B) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sh52).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the drive state of the take-in motor 101 is set to on (Sh53). If the drive state of the take-in motor 101 is set to on, the process execution counter set in the RAM 41c is set. The value is updated (Sh54). In the step of Sh54, 20 is set as an initial value, and 1 is subtracted for each update. When the updated counter value becomes 0, 20 is set again as the initial value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is time to perform processing based on the processing execution counter value (Sh55). In the step of Sh55, first, it is determined whether the driving is based on the capturing operation or the driving based on the returning operation. If the driving is based on the capturing operation, the process execution counter value is a multiple of 5, That is, it is determined whether the value is any one of 5, 10, 15, and 20. If the process execution counter value is a multiple of 5, it is determined that the process is to be performed. On the other hand, if the driving is based on the return operation, it is further determined whether or not the process counter value is 20, and if the process execution counter value is 20, it is determined that the process is to be performed.

  If it is determined that the processing time is determined in the step of Sh55, an input motor position signal is output from the input port after outputting an input motor phase signal for outputting the phase signal of the input motor 101 (Sh56). Then, the register saved in the stack area in Sh52 is restored (Sh58), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sh51 is permitted (Sh59), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

  Further, if the on state is not set as the driving state of the take-in motor 101 in the step of Sh53, or if it is determined in the step of Sh55 that it is not time to perform the processing, the shunt is saved in the stack area in Sh52. The register is restored (Sh58), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sh51 is permitted (Sh59), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

  As described above, in the timer interrupt process (B), it is determined whether the drive of the take-in motor 101 is due to the take-in operation or the return operation, and the execution interval differs accordingly. Specifically, when the drive control of the take-in motor 101 by the timer interrupt process (B) is a drive of the take-in motor 101 based on a take-in operation that requires more accuracy, it is executed at short intervals. In the case of driving the take-in motor 101 based on a return operation that does not require accuracy compared to the take-in operation, the operation is executed at a long interval.

  FIG. 63 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interruption 2, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption processing, first, interruption is prohibited (Sj1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sj2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sj3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sj2 is restored (Sj4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sj1 is permitted (Sj5), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sj3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sj6), and all output ports are initialized (Sj7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sj8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sj9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sj10, where Sj10 is the same process as Sj3), the process enters a loop process in which no process is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the effect control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs an activation process (effect) shown in FIG.

  In the activation process (effect), after the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, I / O port 91d, etc. are initialized (Sk1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sk2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sk3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sk4). If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sk4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal. The production state before power interruption is restored. In the step of Sk5, after setting the last control pattern executed before power interruption, various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55 and the like are set according to the set control pattern. An effect control process for controlling the above is executed (Sk6), interruption is permitted (Sk7), and the process proceeds to a loop process. Further, if the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sk4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal, so after all the data stored in the RAM 91c is initialized (Sk8), the standby state is notified. After setting the standby pattern for the control as a control pattern (Sk9), an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55 in accordance with the set control pattern Is executed (Sk6), the interrupt is permitted (Sk7), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 91a by interrupting and executing another process based on the detection of the strobe signal output from the game control board 40. The strobe signal is a signal that is input to the interrupt terminal of the effect control unit 91 when a command is transmitted.

  In the command reception interrupt process, interrupts are first prohibited (Sk101), and the register is saved in the RAM 91c (Sk102). Then, the command transmission line detection data from the input port, that is, the MODE output from the game control board 40 is acquired (Sk103), and the system waits until the strobe signal is detected again (Sk104).

  Next, when the strobe signal is detected again, the detection data of the command transmission line from the input port, that is, the EXT output from the game control board 40 is acquired again (Sk105). Then, a command composed of MODE and EXT is stored in a buffer provided in the RAM 91c (Sk106). Then, the saved register is restored in Sk102 (Sk107), the interrupt prohibited in Sk101 is permitted (Sk108), and the state before the interruption is restored.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (effect) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of about 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interruption process (effect), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (Sk201). If the command is not stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to Sk206. If the command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (Sk202), and the process proceeds to Sk203.

  In step Sk203, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is an initialization command. If the acquired command is an initialization command, all data stored in the RAM 91c are initialized (Sk204), and the process proceeds to Sk206.

  On the other hand, when the command acquired in the step of Sk203 is not an initialization command, when the acquired command is an internal winning command, the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command is referred to the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. An effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result, and an effect pattern selection process for setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as an effect pattern of the game is executed (Sk205), and the process proceeds to Sk206.

  In the step of Sk206, processing corresponding to the acquired command (for example, processing for setting the gaming state indicated by the command in the RAM 91c if the acquired command is a gaming state command, etc.) is stored in the ROM 91b. Referring to the control pattern table, a control pattern setting process for reading the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the acquired command and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to Sk207.

  In the step of Sk207, in accordance with the control pattern set in the step of Sk206, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55 is executed. Proceed to step.

  In step Sk208, processing for updating the values of various counters such as a random number counter in the RAM 91c is performed, and then the processing proceeds to step Sk209. In step Sk209, the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of activation is normal. Thus, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, and the timer interrupt process (effect) is terminated.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (effect) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 61a of the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 65 to the payout control unit 61, the CPU 61a performs a startup process (payout) shown in FIG.

  In the activation process (payout), first, the above-described payout control board connection confirmation signal is set to on (Sm1). Note that the payout control board connection confirmation signal is always kept on while power is supplied. Then, after initializing all data stored in the RAM 61c, that is, the control state of the payout control unit 61 (Sm2), the interrupt is permitted (Sm3), and the process proceeds to loop processing.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the control contents of timer interrupt processing (payout) executed by the CPU 61a at intervals of about 2 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interruption process (payout), switch detection process (Sn1), connection confirmation process (Sn2), main board communication process (Sn3), lending control process (Sn4), payout control process (Sn5), motor control process (Sn6) ) Are executed sequentially.

  In the switch detection process in the Sn1 step, a process for acquiring detection states of various sensors, switches, and signals is executed. In the connection confirmation process in the Sn2 step, a process of confirming the connection status with the card unit 400 is executed. In the main board communication process in the Sn3 step, a process of exchanging signals with the game control board 40 is executed. In the lending control process in the Sn4 step, a process of exchanging signals with the card unit is executed. In the payout control process in the step of Sn5, a process for setting the drive state of the payout motor 201 is executed. In the motor control process of Sn6, a process of performing output control of the phase signal of the payout motor 201 based on the driving state of the payout motor 201 set in the step of Sn5 is executed.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the detailed control contents of the connection confirmation process executed by the CPU 61a in the step Sn2.

  In the connection confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not VL on is detected, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 is connected (Sn201). If VL on is detected in step Sn201, the card unit connecting signal is turned on. On the other hand, when VL on is not detected in the step of Sn201, the card unit connecting signal is turned off (Sn203).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the main board communication process executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn3.

  In the main board communication process, first, the main board communication process selection flag (0 to 2) indicating the type of the main board communication process is confirmed (Sn301). If the main board communication process selection flag is 0, the main board communication process 1 is performed. (Sn302), if the main board communication process selection flag is 1, the main board communication process 2 is executed (Sn303), and if the main board communication process selection flag is 2, the main board communication process 3 is executed ( Sn304).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the main board communication process 1 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn302.

  In the main board communication processing 1, first, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal “on” is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal is connected to the game control board 40 (Sn311). If the signal on is not detected, the process returns to the original process. If the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in step Sn311, whether or not the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is on, that is, the payout or withdrawal of the prize ball from the game control board 40 is detected. It is determined whether or not the settlement of the included ball is requested (Sn312, Sn313), and if neither the on-off of the payout request signal nor the on-off of the settlement request signal is detected, the process returns to the original processing. In addition, if on of the payout request signal or the settlement request signal is detected in the steps of Sn312 and Sn313, it is determined whether or not payout is possible (Sn314 to Sn316). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supply ball detection switch 205 is detected, that is, whether or not a payout ball is secured, and whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, that is, the return ball guide passage 109. It is determined whether or not the return ball is clogged, and it is determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, whether or not the payout ball is clogged in the payout ball guide passage 208. If the payout is not possible, the process returns to the original process. In addition, in the steps of Sn314 to Sn316, if payout is possible, that is, if the supply ball detection switch 205 is detected and neither the return ball blockage detection switch 111 nor the discharge ball blockage detection switch 112 is detected. The main board communication process selection flag is set to 1 (Sn317), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the main board communication process 2 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn303.

  In the main board communication process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal “on” is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal is connected to the game control board 40 (Sn321). If the signal on is not detected, the main board communication process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn322), and the process returns to the original process. Further, if the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in the step of Sn321, whether or not EXS is on, that is, whether or not the lending control based on the lending request from the card unit 400 is being executed. (Sn323), and if EXS is on, the process returns to the original process. Further, if EXS is not on in the step of Sn323, the value indicated by the ball number signal is read (Sn324), and the value of the read ball number signal is set to the payout counter (game) set in the RAM of the payout control unit 61. (Sn 325) is stored in the counter (which stores the number of balls that have not been paid out of the number of balls to be paid out based on the payout request and settlement request from the control board 40 and the lending request from the card unit 400). The signal is turned on (Sn326). Then, the main board communication process selection flag is set to 2 (Sn327), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the main board communication process 3 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn304.

  In the main board communication process 3, first, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal “on” is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal is connected to the game control board 40 (Sn331). If the signal on is not detected, the process returns to the original process. If the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in the step of Sn331, it is determined whether the value of the payout counter is 0 or whether payout for the payout counter is completed (Sn332). If the counter value is 0, the in-operation signal is turned off (Sn333), the main board communication process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn334), and the process returns to the original process. If the value of the payout counter is not 0 in step Sn332, the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the lending control process executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn4.

  In the lending control process, first, the lending process selection flag (0 to 3) indicating the type of the lending control process is confirmed (Sn401). If the lending process selection flag is 0, the lending communication process 1 is executed (Sn402). If the lending process selection flag is 1, execute the lending communication process 2 (Sn403), if the lending process selection flag is 2, execute the lending communication process 3 (Sn404), and lend if the lending process selection flag is 3. Communication process 4 is executed (Sn405).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the lending communication process 1 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn402.

  In the lending communication process 1, first, it is determined whether or not VL on is detected, that is, whether or not it is connected to the card unit 400 (Sn411). Return to processing. In addition, if VL on is detected in the step of Sn411, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board 40 is connected (Sn412). ), If the game control board connection confirmation signal on is not detected, the process returns to the original process. Further, if the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in the step of Sn412, whether or not BRDY is on, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 notifies that the lending operation has been performed. (Sn413), and if BRDY on is not detected, the process returns to the original process. If BRDY on is detected in the step of Sn413, the lending process selection flag is set to 1 (Sn414), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the lending communication processing 2 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn403.

  In the lending communication process 2, it is first determined whether or not VL on is detected, that is, whether or not it is connected to the card unit 400 (Sn421). If VL on is not detected, lending process selection is performed. The flag is set to 0 (Sn422), and the process returns to the original process. In addition, if VL on is detected in the step of Sn421, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board 40 is connected (Sn423). ) If the game control board connection confirmation signal on is not detected, the lending process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn422), and the process returns to the original process. Further, if the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in the step of Sn423, whether or not BRDY is detected, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 notifies that the lending operation has been performed. (Sn424), if BRDY on is not detected, the lending process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn422), and the process returns to the original process. Further, if BRDY on is detected in the step of Sn424, it is determined whether or not BRQ on is detected, that is, whether pachinko ball lending is requested (Sn425). If not detected, the process returns to the original process. Further, if BRQ on is detected in the step of Sn425, it is determined whether or not payout is possible (Sn426 to Sn428). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supply ball detection switch 205 is detected, that is, whether or not a payout ball is secured, and whether or not the return ball clogging detection switch 111 is detected, that is, the return ball guide passage 109. It is determined whether or not the return ball is clogged, and it is determined whether or not the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected, that is, whether or not the payout ball is clogged in the payout ball guide passage 208. If the payout is not possible, the process returns to the original process. Further, in the steps of Sn426 to Sn428, if payout is possible, that is, if the supply ball detection switch 205 is detected and neither the return ball clogging detection switch 111 nor the discharge ball clogging detection switch 112 is detected. The lending process selection flag is set to 2 (Sn429), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the lending communication process 3 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn404.

  In the lending communication processing 3, first, it is determined whether or not VL on is detected, that is, whether or not it is connected to the card unit 400 (Sn431). If VL on is not detected, lending processing is selected. The flag is set to 0 (Sn432), and the process returns to the original process. In addition, if VL on is detected in the step of Sn431, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board 40 is connected (Sn433). ) If the game control board connection confirmation signal on is not detected, the lending process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn432), and the process returns to the original process. Further, if the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in the step of Sn433, whether or not BRDY is on, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 notifies that the lending operation has been performed. (Sn434), if BRDY on is not detected, the lending process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn432), and the process returns to the original process. Also, if BRDY on is detected in the step of Sn434, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter is 0, that is, whether or not payout for the payout counter has been completed (Sn435). If it is not 0, the process returns to the original process. In addition, if the value of the payout counter is 0 in the step of Sn435, EX is turned on to notify the start of the lending operation (Sn436). Then, the lending unit ball number (25 in this embodiment) which is lent by one lending request is stored in the payout counter (Sn437), the lending process selection flag is set to 3 (Sn438), Return to processing.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the lending communication processing 4 executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn405.

  In the lending communication process 4, first, it is determined whether or not VL on is detected, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 is connected (Sn441). If VL on is not detected, lending process selection is performed. The flag is set to 0 (Sn442), and the process returns to the original process. Further, if VL on is detected in the step of Sn441, it is determined whether or not the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected, that is, whether or not the game control board 40 is connected (Sn443). ) If the game control board connection confirmation signal on is not detected, the lending process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn442), and the process returns to the original process. Further, if the game control board connection confirmation signal on is detected in the step of Sn443, whether or not BRDY is on, that is, whether or not the card unit 400 notifies that the lending operation has been performed. (Sn444), if BRDY on is not detected, the lending process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn442), and the process returns to the original process. Also, if BRDY on is detected in the step of Sn444, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter is 0, that is, whether or not payout for the payout counter has been completed (Sn445). If it is not 0, the process returns to the original process. If the value of the payout counter is 0 in step Sn445, the completion of the lending operation is notified by setting EXS off (Sn446), the lending process selection flag is set to 2 (Sn447), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the payout control process executed by the CPU 61a in the step Sn5.

  In the payout control process, first, the detection status of the payout ball detection switch 202 is checked to determine whether or not a payout ball is detected (Sn501). If a payout ball is detected, 1 is determined from the value of the payout counter. Is subtracted (Sn502).

  Next, the payout control process selection flag (0 to 2) indicating the type of payout control process is confirmed (Sn503). If the payout control process selection flag is 0, the payout start waiting process is executed (Sn504), and the payout control process is performed. If the selection flag is 1, a payout stop waiting process is executed (Sn505). If the payout control process selection flag is 2, a payout waiting process is executed (Sn506).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the payout start waiting process executed by the CPU 61a in the step of Sn504.

  In the payout start waiting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter is 0, that is, whether or not an unpaid ball remains (Sn 511). Return. Further, if the value of the payout counter is not 0 in the step of Sn511, the rotational drive amount of the payout motor 201 according to the value of the payout counter, that is, the rotation necessary for paying out the number of balls set in the payout counter. A drive amount is set (Sn512). Then, the setting of the dispensing motor 201 is turned on and the driving of the dispensing motor 201 is started (Sn 513). Then, the payout control process selection flag is set to 1 (Sn 514), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the payout stop waiting process executed by the payout control unit 61 in the step of Sn505.

  In the payout stop waiting process, first, it is determined whether or not the rotation corresponding to the rotational drive amount, that is, the value of the payout counter has been completed (Sn521). Return to the process. If rotation for the value of the payout counter is completed in the step of Sn521, the setting of the payout motor 201 is turned off and the drive of the payout motor 201 is stopped (Sn522). Then, a passage waiting timer counter set in the RAM of the payout control unit 61 (in order to measure the waiting time required for the pachinko ball paid out by the rotation of the payout motor 201 to be detected by the payout ball detection switch 202). (Sn 523), the payout control process selection flag is set to 2 (Sn 524), and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing detailed control contents of the payout passing waiting process executed by the payout control unit 61 in the step of Sn506.

  In the payout passage waiting process, first, the value of the passage waiting timer counter is decremented by 1 (Sn531), and it is determined whether or not the value of the passage waiting timer counter is 0, that is, whether the passage waiting time has elapsed (Sn532). If the value of the passage waiting timer counter is not 0, the process returns to the original process. If the value of the passage waiting timer counter is 0 in the step of Sn532, the payout process selection flag is set to 0 (Sn533), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the game control unit 41 is initialized for each game, so that the unauthorized program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c. However, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. For example, even if it is attempted to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Furthermore, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, the area that would otherwise be able to store saved data is compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that constitutes the game control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the initialization area 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is executed every game at the end of the game, so that the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are changed for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 which are initialized in different areas depending on each initialization condition, any of the four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the game control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the ROM 41b of the game control unit 41, the start address of the area to be initialized and the initialization size indicating the size of the area to be initialized are registered corresponding to the initializations 1 to 4, and the CPU 41a stores the RAM 41c. When initialization is performed, the initialization table is referenced, the start address and initialization size corresponding to any of initializations 1 to 4 are acquired according to the initialization condition, and a pointer is set to the start address. Then, the initialization size is set (if the initialization size includes the size of the unused stack area, the size of the unused stack area (stack pointer-7FD2 (H)) is calculated and the initialization size is set. ). Then, the area of the address corresponding to each byte from the initialization address where the pointer is set is cleared to 0, and each time the byte is cleared, the initialization size is decremented by 1 and the pointer is advanced by 1. Run until zero. That is, when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c, it does not initialize each area according to the initialization condition, but initializes an area of a specified size from a specified address.

  Therefore, by setting only the start address corresponding to the type of initialization condition and the size of the area initialized at that time in the initialization table of the ROM 41b, the initialization end corresponding to the type of initialization condition is completed. The area corresponding to the type of initialization condition can be initialized without individually setting addresses, and multiple types of initialization can be performed using a common process (RAM initialization process). The capacity of the program for performing multiple types of initialization can be reduced. Further, in the RAM initialization process, the end of the process is determined only by determining whether or not the initialization size is 0. Therefore, the end of the process is determined by comparing the address of the currently initialized byte with the end address. Compared to the case, the processing load can be greatly reduced.

  Further, interrupts are always prohibited during the initializations 1 to 4, and a voltage drop signal is output from the power interruption detection circuit 48 while the data stored in the RAM 41c is being initialized. Even if it is input, the power interruption interrupt process is not executed until the initialization is completed. For example, the power interruption interrupt process is performed at a stage before the initialization is completely completed. It is possible to prevent problems such as initialization data and non-initialization data mixed among power data, and a normal return to the control state before power interruption cannot be performed at the time of recovery.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when determining whether or not winning is allowed in the internal lottery process, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6). If not, it is not determined whether or not the winning is allowed with the probability based on the default setting value (for example, setting 1). In this case as well, the error state due to the RAM abnormal error is controlled, and the game If the progress is disabled, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value is not newly selected / set based on the setting change operation, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. In other words, even when it is not possible to properly determine whether or not winning is allowed in the internal lottery process, the game may be played based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation. Since it is secured, the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the power interruption interrupt processing, destruction diagnosis data (in this embodiment, 5A (H)) in which one of the bits is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in the RAM 41c according to a predetermined data. After storing in the address, adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity based on all the data of the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data becomes 0. In addition to determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 at the start, the destruction It is determined whether or not the diagnostic data is stored normally, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnostic data is also stored normally. The control state is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. As a result, when 00 (H) is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the determination of the RAM parity at the time of startup is performed. However, if the data in the RAM 41c has been cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Since it can be prevented that the data in the RAM 41c is erroneously determined to be normal, it is possible to further increase the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when determining whether or not winning is allowed in the internal lottery process, the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6). If not, the RAM abnormal error state is also controlled in this case, but the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6). In this case, it may be determined whether or not winning is allowed with a probability based on an initial value of the set value (for example, set value 1).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41 a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the effect control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be varied. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  The CPU 41a sets the value of the delay counter at random when transmitting the command, and transmits the command when the delay counter value becomes 0, and the transmission timing of the command is a predetermined time. In the range (2.24 to 35.84 ms), the effect control board 90 side performs an effect that assists the eye based on the reception timing of the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Can be prevented

  In this embodiment, the command transmission timing is delayed in the range of 2.24 to 35.84 ms. At least the symbol of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has a maximum delay time of 1 symbol. What is necessary is just to exceed the time to move.

  Even when a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, these commands are stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c in the order of generation, and each command is transmitted in its generation order, that is, the command is originally transmitted. Since it is transmitted in the order of power, it is possible for the effect control board 90 side to grasp the control state of the CPU 41a in the correct order and perform the effect. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when a power failure occurs in a state where command transmission is delayed, that is, in a command transmission waiting state, and a power interruption interrupt process is performed, the command, transmission pointer, and storage pointer stored in the command queue All of the delay counter values are backed up in the RAM 41c, and at the time of recovery, command transmission control is performed in the state of the command, transmission pointer, storage pointer, and delay counter value stored in the command queue backed up in the RAM 41c. Thus, even if a power failure occurs while waiting for command transmission, the command transmission control can be resumed from the power failure state at the time of recovery, so that the control of the CPU 41a can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs while waiting for transmission of a command transmission command, and the power failure is restored, command transmission control is resumed from the state at the time of the power failure. When a power failure occurs while waiting for command transmission, the delay counter value is newly reset after the recovery, and the delay time based on the reset delay counter value has been reset. Sometimes it may be sent. In other words, if there is a command waiting to be transmitted at the time of recovery, the command may be transmitted when a newly set delay time elapses at the time of recovery. However, the command transmission timing can be changed reliably.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port Before performing the conversion, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, a voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the game control unit 41, and the CPU 41a can execute the power interruption interrupt process even if the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary It is possible to prevent the load it takes.

  In the present embodiment, the voltage monitored by the power interruption detection circuit 48 and the power supply voltage for driving the electrical components connected to the power supply board 75, the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 are separately provided. Since a stable voltage is monitored by the power interruption detection circuit 48 as compared with a power supply voltage that tends to drop depending on the driving status of these electrical components, It is possible to prevent a malfunction such as a voltage drop signal being output along with a voltage drop and an electric interruption interrupt process being performed.

  In addition, during execution of the power interruption interrupt process, the timer interrupt process (A), and the timer interrupt process (B), other interrupts are prohibited. For example, the timer interrupt process ( Even if another interrupt occurs during execution of any interrupt processing, such as when a voltage drop signal is input during execution of A) or timer interrupt processing (B), a double interrupt occurs. In other words, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  Also, when the interrupt timing of power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) are simultaneous, that is, interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously If interrupt 2 is prioritized, power interruption interrupt processing is executed, and if interrupt 2 occurs during execution of timer interrupt processing (A) or timer interrupt processing (B) The power interruption interrupt process is executed after the timer interrupt process (A) or the timer interrupt process (B) is completed, and the power interruption is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interruptions. Since the interrupt process is performed, the power interruption process can be surely performed before the driving of the CPU 41a is stopped.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when an interrupt 1 that is set to unused is generated, the CPU 41a is not immediately returned to the original process. Use interruption processing is executed. For this reason, even when an unused interrupt 1 occurs, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a goes out of control. You can prevent problems.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 calculates and sets the RAM parity adjustment data every time the timer interrupt process (A) is executed. In other words, the process for making it possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of restoration is performed periodically without depending on the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Even when the command is transmitted with a delay, the CPU 91a does not stop before calculating and setting the RAM parity adjustment data due to the delayed transmission of the command. The CPU 91a can accurately determine whether the data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the CPU 41a transmits a command, transmission of a new command is prohibited for at least 4.48 ms, and the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 receives the command reliably. In addition, the time for backing up the received command to the RAM 91c can be secured. In this embodiment, 4.48 ms is applied as a time during which transmission of a new command is prohibited, but at least a time sufficient for the CPU 91a to receive the command and to back up the received command to the RAM 91c. If so, a time shorter than 4.48 ms (eg, 2.24 ms) may be applied.

  In this embodiment, +12 V (VCC), which is the source of the power supply voltage {+5 V (VCC)} of the production control unit 91, is delayed in voltage drop by the capacitor 309 mounted on the power supply board 75 even during a power failure. At least at the time of a power failure, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 is driven until a sufficient time (20 ms in this embodiment) has passed for the CPU 91a to reliably receive the command transmitted in the timer interrupt process (A). Voltage (+ 7V) is maintained, and even when a power failure occurs during command transmission, the CPU 91a can reliably receive the command transmitted at the time of power failure before the drive stops. Longer than the interval at which the command received by the CPU 91a is backed up (timer interrupt processing (effect) execution interval) , It can be reliably back the received command to RAM91c the voltage capable of driving the CPU 91a (+ 7V) is maintained.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game in which a winning accompanied with a payout of a winning ball has occurred, when the CPU 41a requests the number of pachinko balls to be paid out according to the winning, and then detects an off signal during operation. That is, the transition to the next game is allowed on the condition that the CPU 61a has notified that the payout operation based on the payout request has been completed. In other words, the completion of payout of the number of pachinko balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of a winning will allow the transition to the next game, so the payout of pachinko balls based on the occurrence of winning is not completed , It is possible to prevent transition to the next game.

  In addition, when a winning accompaniment with a payout of a winning ball occurs in the captured / paid-off ball indicator 11, the number of already paid out balls out of the winning balls based on the occurrence of the winning ball is displayed. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of pachinko balls paid out as a result of winning a prize in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, every time the payout ball detection switch 202 detects a payout ball, the CPU 41a adds and updates the number of payout balls displayed on the taken-in / paid-off ball indicator 11, so The situation can be reported accurately.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a can detect the payout ball by directly inputting the detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 202 to the game control unit 41. The detection signal is input only to the payout control unit 61, and when the CPU 61a detects a payout ball or when a predetermined number of payout balls are detected, a payout ball signal indicating that is sent to the game control unit 41. The CPU 41a may detect the payout ball by detecting the payout ball signal output from the payout control unit 61.

  In addition, after making a prize ball payout request based on the occurrence of a prize, the CPU 41a detects that the in-operation signal is detected, that is, the CPU 61a notifies the start of a pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request. After that, every time the payout ball detection switch 202 detects a payout ball, it is displayed on the taken-in / paid-off ball display 11 on the condition that it is a period until the end of the payout operation is notified. Since the number of balls already paid out is added and updated, even if noise or the like is mixed in the detection signal of the payout ball detection switch 202 in a state where the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request is not performed by the CPU 61a, it is erroneously captured. Not only is the number of paid-out balls displayed on the finished ball / paid-out ball indicator 11 updated, but the balls are paid out by the lending control based on the lending request from the card unit 400. Even when a pachinko ball is detected by the payout ball detection switch 202, the payout ball number displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11 is not updated. Can be reported more accurately.

  In this embodiment, as the number of paid-out balls displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11, a value obtained by subtracting the number of unpaid balls from the number of prize balls is used. A paid-out ball counter that stores the number of balls is set in the RAM 41c, and a value of the paid-out ball counter is added each time a payout ball paid out by a payout operation based on a payout request is detected. May be used as the number of paid-out balls displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11.

  In the present embodiment, the number of balls that have been paid out is displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11 and the number of balls that have been paid out is updated and displayed each time one ball is detected. For example, a value obtained by dividing the number of balls that have been paid out by the number of unit balls (5 balls) is displayed on the captured ball / paid-off ball indicator 11 and the number of balls that have been paid out is equal to the number of unit balls ( 5) Each time it is detected, the value displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11 may be updated by one, and in this way, the paid-in pachinko ball It is possible to easily grasp the number of bets that can be set by using.

  Further, the CPU 41a does not detect the operation signal off until the payout communication error determination time has elapsed after making the payout request to the payout control unit 61, that is, the pachinko ball based on the payout request. When the completion of the payout cannot be confirmed, it is determined that there is an abnormality associated with the payout operation on the payout control unit 61 side, the payout communication error is notified by controlling to an error state, and the payout request is made The period from when the on signal is detected to on, that is, the period until the start of pachinko ball payout based on the payout request is confirmed, and the off signal is detected after the on signal is detected. It is necessary to determine the payout communication error by separately measuring the two periods, ie, the period until confirming the end of the payout operation after confirming the start of the payout action. Instead, after making a payout request, it is possible to measure only the period until the end of payout of a pachinko ball based on the payout request is confirmed, and it is possible to determine a payout communication error based on the time period. Control for determining abnormality can be simplified.

  Further, even when the CPU 41a determines that a payout communication error has occurred and is informing the fact, it continues to monitor the operating signal. That is, since the communication with the payout control unit 61 is continuously performed, even in such a case, the CPU 41a can grasp the state of the payout operation by the payout control unit 61. Further, even when the CPU 41a determines that a payout communication error has occurred and is informing that, every time the payout ball detection switch 202 detects a pachinko ball paid out by the payout device 200, the value of the unpaid ball counter is changed. The number of balls already paid out and the number of balls already paid out displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11 are also updated accordingly, so that the number of balls already paid out can be accurately notified.

  In this embodiment, an error code indicating a payout communication error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, that is, the payout communication error is reported in the display mode of the display, but the lighting state of the lamp and the sound The payout communication error may be notified by an output or the like, or the payout communication error may be notified by outputting a signal indicating the payout communication error to a peripheral device such as a calling lamp or a hall computer. .

  Further, even when the CPU 41a determines that a payout communication error has occurred and is informing that it has been detected, when the operation signal off is detected and the end of the payout operation based on the payout request is confirmed, that is, the error state is erroneously entered. When the control is performed or when an abnormality on the payout control unit 61 is resolved and the payout operation is normally completed while being controlled in the error state, the error state is automatically canceled and the payout communication error Since the notification is automatically terminated, it is determined as a payout communication error, and even during the notification to that effect, not only can the game be prevented as much as possible, but also the trouble of performing the notification release operation is reduced. It can be omitted. When the CPU 41a determines that the payout communication error is detected and is controlled to be in an error state, that is, when the payout communication error is being notified, the CPU 41a performs the predetermined reset operation (for example, operation of the reset / setting switch 38). The error state (notification of payout communication error) may be canceled, and in this way, a game shop clerk or the like can surely recognize that a payout communication error has occurred.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the CPU 41a cannot confirm the payout of the number of pachinko balls requested by the payout request based on the detection of the payout ball by the payout ball detection switch 202, that is, the unpaid ball counter set in the RAM 41c. Even when the value remains, by detecting the off of the operation end signal, that is, by receiving payout control end information indicating that the payout operation of the pachinko ball based on the payout request is completed on the payout control unit 61 side, Transition to the next game is allowed. That is, even if the CPU 41a misses the detection of the payout ball by the payout ball detection switch 202, if it is confirmed that the payout control unit 61 actually controlling the payout operation has paid out normally, the next game Therefore, the game can be progressed quickly.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unpaid-out number of winning balls due to the occurrence of winning is backed up only by the game control unit 41 at the time of power interruption, and the game control is performed at the time of power restoration. When the number of unpaid balls backed up by the unit 41 remains, the CPU 41a makes a payout request for the number of unpaid balls again to the payout control unit 61, and pays out the number of unpaid balls at the time of power interruption. It has come to be. For this reason, when the power failure is restored, the CPU 61a only needs to perform a normal payout operation based on the payout request made again from the game control unit 41. Therefore, the contents backed up by the game control unit 41 and the payout control unit 61, respectively. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the adjustments consistent with each other, and the control at the time of power failure recovery is not complicated.

  When the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the control shifts to the settlement control, and the detection of each operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is invalid until the settlement control is finished. Until the settlement control is finished, these operations are controlled so as not to be detected. That is, when each of these operations is performed during the execution of the settlement control, the control based on each of these operations is not performed. Since the control is not interrupted or a plurality of controls are not performed repeatedly, the control of the CPU 41a can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, when the capture control is performed based on the detection of the operation of the one-ball capture switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, or the settlement control is performed based on the reception of the operation of the settlement switch 10, these Until the capture control and the settlement control are completed, the detection of each operation of the one-ball capture switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is invalidated. When the operation of the 1-ball take-in switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the settlement switch 10, and the start switch 7 is detected until the loading control and the settlement control are completed, the detection of the operation is stored. If the detection of the operation is stored when the acquisition control or the settlement control being executed is completed, the control corresponding to the detection of the stored operation may be performed at that time. Even in this case, no new control is executed during the execution of the capture control or the settlement control. Therefore, the control of the CPU 41a becomes complicated as each of these operations are performed during the execution of the capture control or the settlement control. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the operation of the one-ball intake switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, regardless of whether or not the pachinko ball is stored in the upper plate 26, the one-ball intake switch 5 or the MAXBET Since a take-in operation corresponding to the number of take-in requests by the operation of the switch 6 is performed, a gaming machine that performs a take-in operation on condition that pachinko balls for the number of unit balls are waiting as in the past Compared to the above, it is possible to quickly take in pachinko balls, and the game can proceed smoothly. If the number of pachinko balls corresponding to the amount of motion is not captured after the capture operation is completed, the capture operation corresponding to the shortage is performed again and the capture operation is retried. If the number of pachinko balls corresponding to the amount of motion is not captured even if the number of times reaches a predetermined number (in this embodiment, the first capture operation is also counted by the retry counter, 2 times), Since the capture control ends, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the capture operation is performed endlessly.

  In this embodiment, when the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, one take-in is performed by the take-in device 100 regardless of whether the pachinko ball is stored in the upper plate 26 or not. The number of balls according to the operation of the take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 (one ball when the one-ball take-in switch 5 is operated, and when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the maximum bet number at that time The number of balls required for setting) is taken in at a time, but the taking operation for taking pachinko balls by a predetermined number (for example, one ball) is repeated, The number of balls to be taken in is taken in accordance with the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, or is taken in a predetermined number of times (for example, in accordance with the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6). A sufficient number of times to capture the number of balls to writing) is performed may be terminated intake control on condition.

  When the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the number of used balls (BET) that has already been taken and used for setting the number of bets from the number of balls (15 balls) necessary to set the maximum bet number. The counter value x 5) and the number of balls already subtracted and the number of unused balls that have not been used for setting the number of bets (value of the unused ball counter) are set in the captured ball counter. In the capture control, an operation of capturing an operation amount for capturing pachinko balls corresponding to the value of the capture ball counter is performed. In other words, when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the taking-in operation is performed only for the number of balls necessary to set the number of bets according to the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 at that time. Can be performed more quickly.

  In the present embodiment, one ball take-in switch 5 that is operated when requesting one pachinko ball to be taken in and the operation that is required when taking in the number of balls necessary to set the maximum bet number are requested. However, in addition to or instead of these switches, there is a 1 BET switch that is operated when requesting the number of balls required to set one bet. In addition, when the operation of the 1BET switch is detected, the number of balls required to set one bet (5 balls) is already less than the number of balls already taken in and the number of unit balls (5 balls). The number of balls that are not used to set the number of bets (the value of the unused ball counter) is subtracted from the number of balls, and the number of pachinko balls for the value of the taken-in ball counter is set in the take-in control. Even if you do the capture operation of the operation amount to capture There. As a result, when the operation of the 1BET switch is detected, only the number of balls required for setting the number of bets corresponding to the operation of the 1BET switch is performed at that time. Can be performed more quickly.

  In addition, since the number of balls taken in by the take-in device 100, that is, the number of used balls and the number of used balls are displayed on the taken-in / paid-out ball indicator 11, The number of taken-in balls can be easily confirmed from the outside.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected effectively, in the state in which the return ball clogging detection switch 111 and the payout ball clogging detection switch 112 are detected, the operation is supplied to the take-in device 100. The pachinko ball is not returned, and the pachinko ball is not returned to the lower plate 25 even though the lower plate 25 is full. It is possible to prevent the pachinko balls from being clogged inside.

  Further, in this embodiment, the card based on the output status of the card unit connection confirmation signal (VL) output from the card unit 400 when a lending request is detected from the card unit 400, that is, when BRQ on is detected. It is determined whether or not the unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are connected, and pachinko balls are rented on condition that the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are normally connected. It is possible to prevent pachinko balls from being rented even though the slot machine 1 is not normally connected.

  When the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are not connected, the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is invalidated, and take-in control is prohibited. That is, since it is impossible to set the number of bets for newly playing a game, it is possible to secure the connection between the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 when playing a game.

  Further, when the connection with the card unit 400 is disconnected during the execution of the capture control and the VL cannot be detected, after the capture control during the execution is completed, the 1-ball capture switch 5 and Since the detection of the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is (successfully) disabled and the take-in control for newly setting a bet number is prohibited, the connection with the card unit 400 is disconnected during the take-in control. It is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated due to the capture control being interrupted in the middle.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are normally connected, it is possible to perform the settlement control by always detecting the operation of the settlement switch 10, so that the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are captured. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage because the pachinko balls and the pachinko balls remaining in the capturing device 100 cannot be returned.

  Also, in this embodiment, when a prescribed number of bets are set according to the gaming state and the game start condition is satisfied, is the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 connected normally? Regardless of whether or not, it is possible to play the game for that amount, so the card unit 400 and the slot can be used even though the number of pachinko balls necessary to start the game has already been captured. It can be prevented that the connection of the machine 1 is cut off and the game cannot be started.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are not connected, an error code indicating that fact is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 so that a connection error is notified. Thus, it can be easily recognized from the outside that the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are not connected.

  In the present embodiment, a connection error is reported by displaying an error code on the game auxiliary display 12. You may alert | report using audio | voice output etc.

  In the present embodiment, the game control board 40 for controlling the game and the payout control board 60 for controlling the payout and lending are provided separately, and the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 provide the connection terminal board 70. The VL output from the card unit 400 is input only to the payout control board 60, and whether or not the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are connected is mounted on the payout control board 60. The CPU 61a of the payout control unit 61 determines, a card unit connecting signal indicating the determination result is output to the game control board 40, and the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 receives the payout control board 40. 1 ball is captured by detecting the card unit connecting signal off from 60 indicating that the card unit 400 is not connected. It switches 5 and disables the detection operation of MAXBET switch 6, so as to inhibit the intake control. For this reason, the game control board 40 that controls the game does not need to be directly connected to the card unit 400 outside the slot machine 1, so that an illegal signal is input from the outside to the game control board 40 and affects the game control. It can prevent giving.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lending request is repeatedly made a plurality of times when the operation of the ball lending switch 29 is detected by the card unit 400, and the number of pachinko machines corresponding to the lending request is detected every time the lending request is detected. A series of lending controls for lending balls are performed. When a winning with a payout of a prize ball occurs during the execution of a series of lending control and a payout request is detected, if the lending operation is being executed, the system waits for the end of the lending operation, The lending control is interrupted, the payout operation based on the payout request is executed with priority over the lending operation, and after the payout operation is completed, the interrupted series of lending control is resumed and the remaining lending operations are executed. It has become. On the other hand, if the lending operation is not being executed, the series of lending control is interrupted at that time, the payout operation based on the payout request is executed with priority over the lending operation, and after the payout operation is completed, The lending control is resumed, and the remaining lending operations are executed. For this reason, when a winning with a payout of a prize ball occurs during the execution of a series of lending control, a payout operation is immediately performed based on the fact that the lending control being executed is interrupted and a winning occurs, and the payout When the operation is completed, the game control unit 41 is notified that the payout of the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request has been completed, and the pachinko balls are accepted for setting the number of bets for the next game. Therefore, the game can be advanced more quickly than in the case where the payout operation is performed after the completion of the lending control.

  In the present embodiment, when a payout request is detected during the execution of a series of lending control, if the lending operation is being executed, the series of lending control is interrupted after completion of the lending operation. However, when a payout request is detected during the execution of a series of loan controls, if the loan operation is being executed, the loan operation is interrupted and a payout operation based on the payout request is executed. After the completion, the suspended lending operation may be resumed. In this case, the lending operation is being executed when a winning combination with a payout of a prize ball occurs during a series of lending control. However, the game indicates that the payout operation based on the fact that the lending operation is interrupted and the winning is generated is immediately performed, and that the number of pachinko balls requested by the payout request is completed by completing the payout operation. Notified to the control unit 41, Since uptake of pachinko balls for setting the bet number of the game is allowed, compared with the case in which a payout operation after completion of lending control, game can proceed more rapidly.

  In the present embodiment, the lending operation is performed a plurality of times in the lending control. However, only one lending operation may be performed in the lending control, and in this case as well, as described above. When a payout request is detected during execution of lending control, if the lending operation is being executed, the lending operation is interrupted, a payout operation based on the payout request is executed, and the payout operation is terminated. Thus, when the winning operation accompanied by the payout of the prize ball occurs during the execution of the lending control, the lending operation is interrupted even if the lending operation is being executed. The payout operation based on the occurrence is immediately performed, and when the payout operation is completed, the game control unit 41 is notified that the payout of the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request is completed, and the next game To set bets Since uptake of pachinko balls is permitted, compared with the case in which a payout operation after completion of lending control, game can proceed more rapidly.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if a lending request is made by the card unit 400 during execution of a payout operation based on a payout request, the payout operation based on the payout request is given priority, and after the payout operation is completed, The lending operation based on the payout request is executed, and the payout operation based on the payout request is not interrupted by the lending request, so that the game can be advanced more quickly.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as a type of winning combination, a small role accompanied by paying out a pachinko ball (prize ball), a re-playing role that does not consume the pachinko ball for the number of bets in the next game. Special roles that accompany game state transition are defined. The special role is accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and depends on the gaming state at that time, so it cannot be said to be a basic role. The playability of slot machines is not just playing a game, but the player is based on the results of the game to acquire pachinko balls (prize balls), so paying out pachinko balls (prize balls) by winning It can be said that the small role with is the most basic role. Here, there are JAC, cherry, watermelon, and bell as types of small roles, but in addition to JAC that wins with a small probability in the regular bonus, it is determined as the types of winning combinations in any gaming state. ing. In this way, by defining the basic small combination as a winning combination regardless of the gaming state, the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  When a big bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to a big bonus that wins JACIN with a transition to a regular bonus with a relatively high probability (winning because there is no missing). The big bonus ends when the total number of pachinko balls (prize balls) paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 2325 regardless of the number of digest games. Here, in a game with a big bonus (including a small role game and a regular bonus), since replay is not defined as a target character for internal lottery, no replay is won. Replay does not reduce the number of pachinko balls held by the player, but does not involve paying out pachinko balls (prize balls). do not do. In other words, even if you make a replay win during the big bonus, it will only increase the number of big bonus games unnecessarily, so by not defining the replay as a target for internal lottery in the big bonus, The game can be efficiently advanced without unnecessarily prolonging the state.

  Further, in the regular bonus game state, a small role (especially bell) is won with a high probability, and a very large number of pachinko balls (prize balls) can be obtained. This regular bonus is transferred not only when winning a JACIN in a small role game but also when winning a regular bonus in a normal gaming state. For this reason, even when the player is in the normal gaming state, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the regular bonus, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, in the regular bonus, in addition to cherry, watermelon, and bell, which are defined in the normal gaming state and small role game, JAC is also defined as a small role. Thereby, the player's sense of expectation in the regular bonus can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the display mode of JACIN for shifting the game state from the small role game to the regular bonus in the big bonus is configured by a combination of “watermelon-JAC-JAC” and is not used as a display mode of other roles. It is. In the regular bonus, in addition to cherry, watermelon, and bell small roles, the JAC display mode is also determined by a combination of “Bell-JAC-JAC” and is not used as a display mode for other roles. It is. For this reason, the relationship between the display mode derived as the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the winning combination is clarified, and the gameability becomes easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped within the range of the maximum stop delay time of 190 milliseconds after the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Since it can be pulled in, the symbol to be stopped can be selected from a range of five symbols. Here, the symbols “watermelon”, “bell”, and “JAC” are always arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Bell, Replay, JAC, and JACIN will not miss out when they are elected. In particular, the bells in the regular bonus will be won with a very high probability of approximately 1 / 1.03, but this will not be missed, so the player will effectively hold on to the regular bonus. It becomes unnecessary, and it becomes possible to advance the game easily.

  As described above, the types of winning combinations that are subject to internal lottery for each gaming state are registered in the winning combination table by gaming state, but the number of judgment values that determine the winning probability of each combination is referred to from the determining table. Stored in the address. In the role-specific table, the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) when a winning of each role occurs is also registered.

  In the role-specific table, the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) is registered according to the number of bets, and when a winning of cherry, watermelon, or bell occurs, the number of pachinko balls (prize balls) is set according to the number of bets (However, the same number of pachinko balls (prize balls) is set for cherry and watermelon as a result). Here, the bet number in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the bet number in the gaming state other than the regular bonus is fixed at 3. Thus, an appropriate number of pachinko balls (prize balls) can be paid out according to the gaming state simply by acquiring the number of prize balls according to the number of bets. Further, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when setting the number of pachinko balls (prize balls), the processing steps in the winning determination process are simplified. In addition, the number of bets 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has a larger number of pachinko balls (prize balls) at the time of winning the bell than the number 3 bets, which further increases the player's expectation in the regular bonus. This can improve the fun of gaming.

  In the role-specific table, for cherry, watermelon, and bell defined as winning combinations in any gaming state, the storage address of the determination value number is registered for each bet number, and the determination value according to the bet number The number is acquired (although, in the case of cherry and watermelon, the same determination value number is acquired as a result). Here, the bet number in the regular bonus is fixed at 1, but the bet number in the gaming state other than the regular bonus is fixed at 3. Thereby, the internal lottery of cherry, watermelon, and bell can be performed with the winning probability corresponding to the gaming state only by acquiring the number of determination values according to the number of bets. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the gaming state when acquiring the determination value number, the processing steps in the internal lottery are simplified. Moreover, since the bet number 1 corresponding to the regular bonus has a higher probability of winning the bell than when the bet number is 3, the player's expectation in the regular bonus is further increased, and the interest of the game is improved. Can do.

  In addition, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value. For the winning combination, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, even if the target number of the internal lottery is the same as the set bet number and the address storing the number of judgment values referenced according to the set value is different, it is stored at a different address. In some cases, the number of determination values is the same.

  In general, in the development stage, the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of determination values according to the set values for at least some of the combinations (that is, adjusting the winning probability of internal lottery). As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  Further, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination registered in the combination table is different depending on the number of bets (1 or 3), but is stored at different addresses such as cherry or watermelon, for example. In some cases, the same number of determination values is used.

  In the development model, it is normal to perform simulation while finely adjusting the judgment value data according to the number of bets (the same as when the initial number of judgment values is different) There may be cases). Here, even if the number of decision values adjusted by the simulation becomes the same regardless of the number of bets, the number of decision values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as the address assignment in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each role referred from the role-specific table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether or not the result of the addition overflows, Judgment is made on whether or not there is a win. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination as it is. In addition, when generating the winning determination table before the actual winning determination is performed, the loop processing is required twice. However, according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing may be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency of the entire lottery process is high.

  Further, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the lottery for the small combination and re-playing combination and the lottery for the special combination are separately performed based on the same random number for internal lottery. Then, after the special combination is established, that is, in a state where the special combination winning flag is carried over, only the small combination and the re-playing combination are drawn. For this reason, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate. Furthermore, since the lottery for the small role and the re-playing role can be shared before and after the special role is established, the internal lottery in the normal gaming state can be simplified, and in the state where the special role is carried over after the special role is established. Since it is only necessary to perform the lottery of the small combination and the re-playing combination, the processing efficiency of the internal lottery in the state where the winning of the special combination is carried over becomes high.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for the small role and replaying role and the lottery for the special role are separately performed based on the same random numbers for internal lottery. In the state where the winning flag is carried over, only the small role and the re-playing role are drawn, but even after the special role is established, If a special role is won by a special role lottery, the winning may be treated as invalid. Even in this case, multiple special roles may be won in duplicate. Absent.

  In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role It is possible to specify the range of judgment values for winning a small role, replaying role, and special role independently, and the range of judgment values for winning a small role and special role in duplicate. If the value obtained as a random number for internal lottery is included in the range of judgment values for each of the small role, replaying role, and special role specified by these judgment value numbers, It is determined that the re-playing role and the special role are each elected independently, and if both the small role and the special role are included in the range of judgment values to be won, both the small role and the special role are elected. It comes to judge. For this reason, if the value within the range in which the winning of both the special role and the small role is determined is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, the special role and the small role will be won at the same time. When the value of the range in which only the winning is determined is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, only the special combination or the small combination will be selected. As a result, even if a small role winning is generated as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special role having a higher advantage than the small role is allowed. A player's expectation can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role are stored. Based on the number of judgment values, it is possible to specify the range of judgment values for winning a small role, replaying role, and special role independently, and the range of judgment values for winning a small role and special role in duplicate. However, the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the judgment value stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role From the number, it may be possible to specify only the range of the judgment value that the re-playing role is won alone, and the range of the judgment value that the small role and the special role are won in duplicate. According to such a configuration, the game As a result of a small role winning as a result of Expected for that you have selected haves. In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role In addition, it may be possible to specify only the range of the judgment value that the re-playing role and the special role will be won alone, and the range of the judgment value that the small role and the special role will be won, and according to such a configuration, Even if the small role is not won as a result of the game, it is not denied that the special role is won, so the player's expectation for the special role can be maintained even in such a situation. In addition, from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the re-playing role and the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the special role In addition, it may be possible to specify only a range of judgment values for winning a re-playing role and a small role alone, a range of judgment values for winning a small role and a special role, and according to such a configuration, Even if a small role wins as a result of the game, it is not denied that the special role has been won. Therefore, even in such a situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination value for winning the big bonus (1) to (3) and the watermelon overlaps rather than the range of the determination value for winning the big bonus (1) to (3) and the cherry. The probability of winning the big bonuses (1) to (3) and watermelon at the same time is higher than the probability of winning the big bonuses (1) to (3) and cherry at the same time. Is higher. As a result, when the watermelon wins more than when the cherry wins, there is a higher possibility of winning at the same time as the big bonuses (1) to (3). Since the expectation of winning the big bonuses (1) to (3) can be changed depending on the type of the small role, the interest can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for internal lottery acquired by the random number acquisition process is not used as it is from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43 but is used after being processed by software. Yes. The random number generation circuit 42 generates a random number by updating at a high speed at the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a. However, in the random number for internal lottery after processing by software, the periodicity of the update is increased by the processing. It will be lost.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, since the number of determination values corresponding to each combination is sequentially added to the random value for the internal lottery, each combination is determined to be a winning combination as shown in FIGS. The random number value for the internal lottery to be set will be hardened. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming as much as possible by losing the periodicity of the random numbers for internal lottery by processing by software and varying the values.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 to be synchronized with the process performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  On the other hand, the processing of random numbers by software is performed by replacing the upper byte and lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43, masking the 15th and 7th bits, and then bit-shifting the upper byte. good. Therefore, even for a relatively large random number of 16 bits (actually masked 14 bits), the load required for processing necessary to lose periodicity is not so large, and can be easily obtained. Can do. Since a large random number can be acquired in this way, the probability setting in the internal lottery can be finely performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, specific 2 bits (15th and 7th bits in this embodiment) are masked out of 2 bytes (16 bits) of random numbers extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43. A 14-bit random number is obtained. In general, a general-purpose random number generation circuit outputs a 16-bit random number. However, as a range of random numbers used in the internal lottery, a 14-bit random number is sufficient, and a 16-bit random number is used. If acquired as it is, the range of random numbers is too large, so the amount of data stored in the role-specific table increases, the storage area of the ROM 41b is compressed, and the numerical value to be processed in the internal lottery is also This is because the load on the CPU 41a also increases because it increases.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a 14-bit random number obtained by masking a specific 2-bit among 2-byte (16-bit) random numbers extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43 is acquired. Even if an inexpensive general-purpose random number generation circuit is used, the storage area of the ROM 41b is not compressed, and the load on the CPU 41a is not increased.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the determination value number storage area of the RAM 41c in which the determination value number used for the internal lottery is stored uses a 2-byte area to store the determination value number in each case. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common. The same applies to the number of determination values for the bet number. For example, the bet numbers 1 and 2 may be common and the bet number 3 may be individual.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the number of bets for the same combination at the same set value is stored at a different address for each of the bets (1 or 3). That is, for the same combination at the same set value, even if the number of judgment values referred to according to the number of bets is the same, it is stored separately, but the combination with the same winning probability regardless of the number of bets For the role that makes the determination value number storage address common, or for the role that makes the winning probability the same regardless of the setting value and the number of bets, the address of the determination value number storage address is made common In this way, by storing the number of determination values in common, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for that purpose.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, the 15th and 14th bits of the random number for internal lottery are set to “0”, and the subtraction result overflows (here, the subtraction result is negative) It can be determined whether or not

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination according to the game situation is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows, the winning combination is won. It was supposed to be judged. On the other hand, a winning determination table in which a determination value for determining each combination as winning is determined for each game in accordance with the number of determination values for each combination according to the game situation, and the internal random number for internal lottery acquired It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing this value with the determination value of each combination. In addition, a winning determination table in which determination values for determining each winning combination are stored in advance in the ROM 41b, and an internal lottery value is compared by comparing the acquired internal random number value with the determination value for each winning combination. It is also good to do

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the bet number in the small role game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus. On the other hand, even in the small game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus, it is possible to start the game by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, by setting 2 as the bet number, You may be able to get started. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the small game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lower than when 3 is set as the bet number. In both cases, the number of winning balls when winning a small role can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the small game in the normal gaming state and the big bonus, the winning probability of the bell is 1 / 4.6 and the winning ball number is 40, but the bet number is 1 or When 2 is set, the winning probability of the bell may be 1 / 240.9, and the number of prize balls may be 75. Furthermore, the winning probability of the bell and the number of winning balls may be changed when 1 is set as the number of bets and when 2 is set.

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the small role and the replaying role referring to the role-specific table for the small role and the replaying role, and the special role The special role lottery that refers to the role-specific table is separately performed, and the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table for the small role and the replay role and the special role Based on the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that each small role, replaying role, and special role win independently, and the small role and special role are won in duplicate. The range of judgment values to be specified can be specified, so that special roles and small roles can be won at the same time, but in the role table, the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding only to special roles , Both special and small roles In the internal lottery, the storage address of the corresponding determination value number, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding only to the small role, and the storage address of the determination value number corresponding only to the replaying role are registered respectively. If the number of judgment values for each role referenced from the role table is added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the special role overflows, the special role If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the small role overflows, the winning of both the special role and the small role is determined, and the small role or replay role If the result of addition with the number of decision values corresponding to only overflows, the winning combination of only the small role or replaying role is judged, so that the special role and the small role can be won simultaneously. You can also. In other words, it is possible to specify a range of judgment values for winning a small role, a replaying role, and a special role separately from a single role-specific table, and a range of judgment values for winning a small role and a special role in duplicate. By doing so, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a special role and a small role can be won simultaneously.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modified example of the role-specific table, and FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the internal lottery process.

  The role-specific table shown in FIG. 83 includes big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2), JACIN, JAC, cherry, big bonus (1 ) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Cherry, Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Bell, Replay The storage addresses for the number of judgment values are registered in the order in which they are referenced.

  The number of determination values for each combination is registered corresponding to the number of bets (BET) set by the player in the game. This is because even with the same combination, the winning probability in the regular bonus may differ from other combinations. In addition, the number of determination values according to the number of bets for each combination may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (3), Regular Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon is a role subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and a determination corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state The storage address for the number of values is registered. Among these roles, the value of the common flag is 0 for the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the big bonus (3), and the regular bonus (1). The storage address for the number of judgment values is registered. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon The common flag value is 1, and the storage address of the common number of judgment values is registered regardless of the set value. Regular bonus (2) and JACIN are internal lottery targets only in the small bonus game in the big bonus, and the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the small bonus game is registered. . The value of the common flag for this role is 1, and a storage address for a common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The JAC is a role that is subject to internal lottery only with the regular bonus, and the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 1 with the regular bonus is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value. Replay is a role that is subject to internal lottery only in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 in the normal gaming state is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, bell, and watermelon are the targets for internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to the bet number 1 in the regular bonus, and in the normal gaming state or small role game A storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the bet number 3 is registered. For cherry and watermelon, the common flag is 1, and a storage address for the common number of determination values is registered corresponding to the number of bets regardless of the set value. For the bell, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value corresponding to each bet number.

  Next, based on the flowchart shown in FIG. 84, the modified example of the internal lottery process which CPU41a performs is demonstrated.

  In this internal lottery process, a random number acquisition process is performed (Sc1001). In this random number acquisition process, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired based on the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42.

  Then, the set value stored in the RAM set value work is read (Sc1002), and whether or not the read set value is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the read set value is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the RAM 41c (Sc1004), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  Further, if the set value read in the step of Sc1003 is in the range of 1 to 6, the combinations registered in the combination table of FIG. 83 are sequentially read corresponding to the current gaming state (Sc1005). The types of roles read here are regular bonus (regular bonus (1), regular bonus (2)), big bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3) (+ cherry, + watermelon) Is not included))) (Sc1006). If it is one of the regular bonus, big bonus, or JACIN, is the regular bonus or big bonus winning flag already set in the RAM 41c in the previous game, and whether it has been carried over without winning based on the winning flag? It is determined whether or not (Sc1007). If the type of the read combination is neither a regular bonus nor a regular bonus, the process proceeds to Sc1008.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus or the big bonus has already been set, the process returns to the process of Sc1005, and further, the next registered role in the winning combination table by game state is read (regular bonus, big bonus and JACIN Is registered first in the role table, and this does not end the lottery process). Even if the type of the read combination is regular bonus, big bonus, or JACIN, if neither the regular bonus winning flag nor the big bonus winning flag is set, the process proceeds to Sc1008.

  In Sc1008, the number of BETs set in step Sa301 is further read, and the setting state of the common flag is acquired from the role-specific table in FIG. 83 for the role and the role corresponding to the read BET number. As a result, it is determined whether or not a common flag is set for the combination and the BET number (Sc1009).

  If the common flag is set, the number of determination values stored in the address registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 83 for the role and the BET number is acquired (Sc1010). Then, the process proceeds to Sc1012. If the common flag is not set, the setting value set in the RAM 41c is read, and the determination stored in the address registered in the role-specific table corresponding to the setting value read for the role and the BET number The number of values is acquired (Sc1011). Then, the process proceeds to Sc1012.

  In the step of Sc1012, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sc1010 or Sc1011 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value for internal lottery. Here, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sc1013). If an overflow occurs, the winning combination is Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Cherry, or Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + It is determined whether or not it is watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon (Sc1014). Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Cherry, or Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + If it is not a watermelon, the winning flag of the combination is set in the RAM 41c (Sc1014). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step Sc1014, the winning combination is a big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (3) + cherry, or big bonus (1) + watermelon, big bonus (2) + watermelon, big If it is bonus (3) + watermelon, it is determined whether a regular bonus or big bonus winning flag has already been set in the RAM 41c in the previous game and is carried over without winning based on the winning flag (Sc1016). ). If neither the regular bonus winning flag nor the big bonus winning flag is set, the corresponding winning flag of Big Bonus (1) to (3) and the winning flag of Cherry or the corresponding of Big Bonus (1) to (3) The winning flag and the watermelon winning flag are set in the RAM 41c (Sc1017). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the winning flag for the regular bonus or the big bonus has already been set in the step of Sc1016, the winning flag for cherry or the winning flag for watermelon is set in the RAM 41c (Sc1018). Then, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If no overflow has occurred in the step of Sc1013, it is determined whether there is a combination that has not yet been processed among the combinations determined for the gaming state (Sc1019). If there is a combination that has not yet been processed, the process returns to the processing of Sc1005, and the process continues with the next combination registered in the winning combination table according to gaming state being processed. If there is no combination not to be processed, the internal lottery process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, according to the modification by applying the role-specific table shown in FIG. 83 and the internal lottery process shown in FIG. If it is acquired as a random number, the special role and the small role will be elected at the same time. Will be elected. As a result, even if a small role winning is generated as a result of the game, it is not denied that the occurrence of a special role having a higher advantage than the small role is allowed. A player's expectation can be maintained. In addition, since it is not necessary to register the number of judgment values corresponding to the special role lose, it is possible to save the capacity of the ROM 41b and to share the internal lottery process regardless of the gaming state, thereby simplifying the program. it can.

  Note that, in the above configuration, the range of determination values that each of the small combination, replay combination, and special combination wins independently from the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the combination table shown in FIG. And a range of judgment values for winning a combination of small and special roles, but it is possible to replay from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table. It may be possible to specify only a range of judgment values for winning a combination, and a range of judgment values for winning a combination of small roles and special roles. If you win a prize, you can expect to be elected for a special role. Also, from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that the re-playing part and special part win independently, the judgment value that the small part and special part wins redundantly However, according to such a configuration, even if a small role is not won as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special role is won. Even in the situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be maintained. In addition, from the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role-specific table, the range of judgment values that the re-playing part and small part wins alone, the judgment value that the small part and special part wins in duplicate However, according to such a configuration, even if a small role wins as a result of the game, it is not denied that a special role is won. Can maintain the player's expectation of winning special roles.

  In the above configuration, after the special role is established, that is, in the state where the special role winning flag is carried over, the value of the determination value range in which the special role is won alone is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. If the value of the range of judgment values for winning a combination of small roles and special roles is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is determined that only the small role is won, Even if multiple special roles are not won, it will be lost even when the value of the judgment value range in which small and special roles are won in duplicate is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Even in this case, a plurality of special roles will not be won in duplicate. In addition, after the special role is established, the role-specific table in which data that can specify the range of the judgment value that the special role wins alone and the judgment value range that the small role and the special role wins are not registered, In other words, the internal lottery process may be performed by the role-specific table in which only data that can specify the range of the determination value that the re-game player wins and data that can specify the range of the determination value that the small role wins are registered. Well, even in this case, multiple special roles will never win.

  In the above embodiment, the entire high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is replaced with the low-order byte, and the entire low-order byte is replaced with the high-order byte. On the other hand, the data of a specific bit among the random number bits extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is simply replaced with data of other bits (however, other than the masked seventh and fifteenth bits). Also good. Alternatively, the random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be directly acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Further, it may be processed into a random number for internal lottery by a method different from the above embodiment.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram of a first modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in the first modification, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general-purpose register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The value of the lower byte of the general register 41GR (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) is left as it is.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs an OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, a value obtained by adding a processing random number to the upper byte with 8080h. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. The CPU 41a acquires the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values to this.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of the process until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in this example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the 16-bit general-purpose register 41GR included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register 41R as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R to the value of the upper byte of the general-purpose register 41GR (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R is also added to the lower byte value (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the general-purpose register 41GR.

  Next, the CPU 41a performs a logical OR operation with the value of the general-purpose register 41GR, that is, the value obtained by adding the processing random numbers to the upper byte and the lower byte, respectively, with 8080h. Furthermore, the CPU 41a shifts the upper 1 byte (8th bit to 15th bit) to the lower bit by bit, and inserts 1 into the empty 15th bit. The CPU 41a acquires the value stored in the general-purpose register 41GR at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values to this.

  In the first and second modified examples described above, the value of the refresh register 41R is extracted as a random number for processing, and this is extracted from the high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 (in the second modified example, further lower order In addition, the random number is processed. The random number processing applied here includes at least processing for adding a processing random number to the upper byte. Thereby, the variation of the random numbers for internal lottery can be increased, and the player can prevent the aiming as much as possible.

  Further, since the processing random numbers are extracted from the refresh register 41R, no special configuration is required as means for generating the processing random numbers. Moreover, the value of the refresh register 41R is updated every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction, and the update interval is not constant. Therefore, a random number with high randomness can be extracted as a processing random number. And since the randomness of the processing random number is high, the randomness of the random number for internal lottery generated using the random number is also high.

  In the first and second modifications, the value extracted from the refresh register 41R is added to the upper byte (and the lower byte) of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. A value that is periodically updated by hardware or software may be added. Further, instead of adding a value extracted from the refresh register 41R (or a value replacing the refresh register 41R), a logical operation such as subtraction, logical sum, or logical product may be performed.

  Further, bit replacement such as replacement of the upper byte and the lower byte shown in the above embodiment may be used in combination with the first and second modifications. Also in the first and second modified examples, the interrupt to the CPU 41a is prevented in order to prevent the contents of the general-purpose register 41GR from being rewritten between the extraction of the random number from the random number generation circuit 42 and the end of the processing. It will be prohibited.

  Further, in the second modification, processing random numbers to be added to the upper and lower bytes of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be separately extracted from the refresh register 41R at different timings. Separately prepare the processing random number to be added to the upper byte and the processing random number to be updated to the lower byte. Means for extracting may be provided. In this case, one of the means for updating the processing random number for the upper byte and the means for updating the processing random number for the lower byte can be constituted by the refresh register 41R.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42, that is, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is processed by software has been described. However, the random number processing by the software described above may be applied to random numbers that are periodically updated by software. For example, the CPU 41a sends an instruction to the second microcomputer to extract a random number periodically updated by a timer interrupt or the like in a second microcomputer different from the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41, and I The data can be input to the CPU 41a via the / O port 41d and stored in the general-purpose register 41GR. The function of the second microcomputer may be included in the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. Also in this case, the random number value obtained after the processing can be varied, and the effect of preventing the player from aiming can be achieved.

  In the embodiment, when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c, the initialization table of the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address and initialization size corresponding to any of initializations 1 to 4 are determined according to the initialization conditions. Acquire, set the pointer to the start address, set the initialization size, clear the area of the corresponding address by 1 byte from the initialization address where the pointer was set, and initialize the size every time 1 byte is cleared 1 is subtracted and the process of advancing the pointer by 1 is executed until the initialization size becomes 0, so that the area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization condition is initialized. The addressed area is set as a continuous address area, and the initialization table corresponds to one of initialization 1 to 4 depending on the initialization condition The start address and the end address common to all of initializations 1 to 4 are registered, and when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c, the initialization table is referred to and the initialization address is initialized according to the initialization condition. The start address corresponding to any one of 1 to 4 is acquired, the pointer is set to the start address, and the area of the corresponding address is cleared to 0 by 1 byte from the initialization address to which the pointer is set, and 1 byte is cleared. Each time the pointer is advanced, the area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization condition may be initialized by executing the process of advancing the pointer until the end address area common to the initializations 1 to 4 is cleared. .

  In this case, each time 1 byte is cleared, it is determined whether the address indicated by the pointer is the end address. If the address is the end address, the initialization may be terminated. The initialization byte number from the start address to the common end address is calculated and set, and every time 1 byte is cleared from the start address, the initialization byte number is decremented by 1 and the pointer is advanced by 1. It is preferable that the process is executed until the number reaches zero, and it is determined that the end address area has been cleared when the number of initialization bytes reaches zero, and the initialization is terminated. This is because the process of determining whether the number of initialization bytes is 0 is higher than the process of comparing the address indicated by the pointer and the end address for each byte.

  87 (a) is a diagram showing a modification of the storage area of the RAM 41c, FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the initialization table, and FIG. 88 is a modification of initialization 1. It is a flowchart to show.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in this modification, the storage area of the RAM 41c is 7E00 (H), the set value work, special work, important work, non-saved work, general work, unused area, unused. The stack area is allocated in the order of the stack area in use. For this reason, even if any of initialization 1, 2, and 4 is performed, the initialized area becomes a continuous address area. Specifically, the areas initialized in the initialization 1 are all areas except the in-use stack area, that is, set value work, special work, important work, unsaved work, general work, unused area, unused stack. These areas are continuous address areas from 7E00 (H) to the stack pointer. The areas initialized in the initialization 2 are general work, unused area, and unused stack area, and these areas are continuous address areas from 7E53 (H) to the stack pointer. The areas initialized in the initialization 4 are an unused area and an unused stack area. These areas are continuous address areas from 7F05 (H) to the stack pointer. In initialization 2, general work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. In initialization 3, non-saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. The unused area and the unused stack area that are initialized in the initialization 3 are continuous address areas, but the non-saved work is a non-continuous address area.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the initialization table applied in this modification, start addresses are registered corresponding to initializations 1 to 4, and end addresses that are common to initializations 1 to 4. Is registered. In addition, since the initialization 3 is an address area where non-saved work is not continuous, the initialization size is registered corresponding to the start address of the non-saved work.

  Next, a modification of the initialization 1 executed by the CPU 41a will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In this initialization 1, first, the initialization address in the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address registered corresponding to the initialization 1 is read (Sm101). Then, a pointer is set to the read start address (7E00 (H)) (Sm102). Next, referring to the initialization table of the ROM 41b, the end address common to the initializations 1 to 4 is read (Sm103). Then, the number of bytes from the start address (7E00 (H)) read in Sm101 to the end address (stack pointer) read in Sm103 is calculated (Sm104), and the number of bytes in the area for initializing the calculated number of bytes is set. (Sm105). Then, a RAM clear process for clearing data from the start address set in Sm102 to the number of bytes set in Sm105 is executed (Sm106). When the RAM clear process is completed, the initialization 1 is completed. Return to.

  The initialization 2 and 4 are almost the same processing as the initialization 1 shown in FIG. 88, and the start address of initialization 2 or initialization 4 registered in the initialization table is acquired. Then, the number of bytes from the start address to the common end address is calculated, and the data is cleared over the calculated number of bytes from the start address. In the modification of initialization 3, first, the start address and initialization size of the non-saved work registered in the initialization table are acquired, and after the data is cleared from the start address over the number of bytes corresponding to the initialization size, Get the start address of the unused area and unused stack area registered in the initialization table, calculate the number of bytes from the start address to the common end address, and clear the data over the calculated number of bytes from the start address Perform the process.

  According to the modification of the initialization of the RAM 41c as described above, for a plurality of initialization conditions, only the start address corresponding to the initialization table and the end address common to the plurality of initialization conditions are set. Because it is possible to initialize areas corresponding to multiple initialization conditions without individually setting end addresses corresponding to multiple initialization conditions, the program capacity for performing multiple types of initialization Can be reduced.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. The checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum is stored is calculated. If the result is 00 (H), it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and must be 00 (H). For example, it may be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is Since the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00 (H), it is determined that the data of the RAM 41c is normal. This is because it can.

  In this case as well, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5A (H)) in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address, and at the time of restoration In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00 (H), it is also determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normally stored. The checksum is 00 (H) and the destructive diagnosis is performed. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the business data is also normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00 (H) is stored in all areas, it will be determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, After storing the destructive diagnostic data with the bit set to 1, calculate the checksum and store it in a specific area, and also check the destructive diagnostic data in addition to checking the checksum at startup, For example, even if all areas are cleared to 0 at startup, and the checksum is 00 (H) and determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of power failure, Since the determination is made, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in the RAM 41c.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00 (H). RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area, and the RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is calculated, and the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area is calculated. The data in the RAM 41c depends on whether the comparison result matches It may be determined whether normal or not. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above-described embodiment, 5A (H) is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, if data other than 0 is stored and can be confirmed at startup, for example, Even when all areas are cleared to 0 at startup, the data for failure diagnosis does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal. Therefore, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal. The determination accuracy can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the data of RAM41c are determined only at the time of starting of the game control part 41, you may make it determine for another opportunity, for example, for every game.

  In the above embodiment, the game control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the game control unit 41. However, the game control unit 41 is connected to the reset circuit. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the game control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected, or when the period continues for a certain period.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40, but it may be mounted in other places. For example, the game control board 40 may be connected to the power supply board 75 or the power supply board 75. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  In the embodiment, the CPU 61a of the payout control unit 61 mounted on the payout control board 60 determines whether or not the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are connected, and the card unit connecting signal indicating the determination result. Is output to the game control board 40. A card unit connection signal (VL) indicating that the card unit 400 is normally connected is connected to a connection terminal board as shown in FIG. The CPU 61a and the CPU 41a determine whether or not the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are connected to each other by branching at 70 or the payout control board 60 and inputting to both the payout control board 60 and the game control board 40. Then, the CPU 61a makes a lending request on the condition that the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are determined to be connected. In response, the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the operation of the one-ball take-in switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 and determines that the card unit 400 and the slot machine 1 are not connected. Control may be prohibited, and in this way, the control load on the CPU 61a can be distributed and reduced, and it is ensured whether both the CPU 61a and the CPU 41a are connected to the card unit 400. Can be determined. In this case, two card unit connection signals indicating that the card unit 400 is normally connected are separately output from the card unit 400, one signal is input to the game control board 40, and the other May be input to the payout control board 60.

  Further, in the embodiment, when a winning with a payout of a prize ball occurs during execution of a series of lending control and a payout request is detected, if the lending operation is being executed, the lending operation is terminated. Waiting, suspending a series of lending control, executing a payout operation based on a payout request with priority over the lending operation, and after the payout operation is completed, restarting the suspended lending control, and the remaining lending operations On the other hand, if the lending operation is not being executed, the series of lending control is interrupted at that time, the payout operation based on the payout request is executed in preference to the lending operation, and after the payout operation is completed, The suspended lending control is resumed and the remaining lending operations are executed. However, when a winning request with a payout of a prize ball occurs and a payout request is detected during the series of lending control, Control is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  FIG. 90 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine to which a first modification and a second modification of lending control during payout control are applied.

  In the slot machine to which the first modified example and the second modified example of the lending control during the payout control are applied, in addition to the above-mentioned payout counter, a part of the storage area of the RAM 61c of the payout control unit 61 is used for winning. A payout counter 1 and a payout payout counter 2 are provided. When the CPU 61a detects a payout request from the game control unit 41 other than during the lending operation, the value read from the ball number signal, that is, the occurrence of a win The number of pachinko balls to be paid out is stored in the payout payout counter 1 and the payout counter, and when a payout request is detected from the game control unit 41 during execution of the lending operation, the value read from the ball count signal is paid out It is stored in the counter 1 and the payout payout counter 2.

  Then, the CPU 61a sets the value of the payout payout counter 1 among these values, regardless of whether the payout operation is being executed or the lending operation is being executed, the payout ball detection switch 202 pays out the pachinko ball. Each time it is detected, the value is decremented by one. When the value of the winning payout counter 1 becomes 0, the operating signal is turned off and the payout operation based on the payout request to the game control unit 41 is performed. Will be notified that is finished. The CPU 61a does not subtract the value of the payout payout counter 2 even if the payout ball detection switch 202 detects the payout of the pachinko ball during the lending operation, and when the value of the payout counter becomes 0, That is, it is stored in the payout counter when the lending operation is completed.

  In the above configuration, when the CPU 61a detects a payout request from the game control unit 41 other than during the lending operation, the value read from the ball number signal is stored in the payout payout counter 1 and the payout counter. When a payout request is detected from the game control unit 41 during the execution of the lending operation, the values read from the ball number signal are stored in the payout payout counter 1 and the payout payout counter 2. Regardless of whether or not the game is being executed, when a payout request is detected from the game control unit 41, the value read from the ball number signal is stored in both the payout payout counter 1 and the payout payout counter 2 and is always won. The payout operation may be performed based on the value of the payout counter 2.

  FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing an operation state in the case where a winning with payout of a prize ball occurs during execution of the lending operation in the slot machine to which the first modification of the lending control during payout control is applied.

  In this modified example, when the CPU 61a detects that the payout request signal is on during the lending operation, the value of the ball signal is stored in the payout payout counter 1 and the payout payout counter 2, respectively, and the payout request is made with the operating signal on. The game control unit 41 is notified of the start of a pachinko ball payout operation based on (tn1). When the lending operation is completed (tn2), the value of the winning payout counter 2 is moved to the payout counter and stored in the payout counter even when the BRQ is detected again. The payout operation of paying out the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request, that is, the payout request is started (tn3). Even before the payout operation ends, when the value stored in the payout payout counter 1 becomes 0, that is, the number of pachinko balls paid out by the lending operation and the payout operation thereafter. When the sum of the number of pachinko balls reaches the number requested by the payout request, the game control unit 41 is notified of the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request by turning off the operating signal (tn4). ). When the payout operation is completed (tn5), EX is turned on to notify the card unit 400 of the start of a pachinko ball lending operation based on BRQ (tn6), and a lending operation for lending a pachinko ball of the number of lending units is started. (Tn7).

  As described above, in the slot machine to which the first modification of the lending control during the payout control is applied, a winning with a payout of a prize ball occurs during the lending operation based on the lending request from the card unit 400, and the CPU 61a When a payout request is detected, the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request is performed after the lending operation is completed. After the payout request is detected, whether the payout is based on the payout operation or the payout based on the loan operation. First, when the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request is paid out, the game control unit 41 is notified that the payout of the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request has been completed, and the bet number of the next game Since the pachinko ball can be taken in to set up the game, the game can be played more quickly than when the payout operation is completed based on the completion of the payout operation. It is possible to row.

  FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the operation situation in the case where a winning accompanied by paying out a prize ball occurs during execution of the lending operation in the slot machine to which the second modified example of the lending control during payout control is applied. is there.

  In this modified example, when the CPU 61a detects that the payout request signal is on during the lending operation, the value of the ball signal is stored in the payout payout counter 1 and the payout payout counter 2, respectively, and the payout request is made with the operating signal on. The game control unit 41 is notified of the start of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the game (tp1). Then, when the value stored in the payout payout counter 1 becomes 0 during execution of the lending operation, that is, when the number of pachinko balls paid out by the lending operation reaches the number requested by the payout request. The game control unit 41 is notified of the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request with the in-operation signal off (tp2). When the BRDY off is detected after completion of the lending operation (tp3), the value of the payout payout counter 2 is moved to the payout counter, and the number stored in the payout counter, that is, the number requested by the payout request The paying-out operation for paying out the pachinko balls is started (tp4). If the value stored in the payout payout counter 1 does not become 0 during the lending operation and becomes 0 during the subsequent payout operation, the in-operation signal is set to off at that time. The game control unit 41 is notified of the end of the pachinko ball payout operation based on the payout request.

  In this way, in the slot machine to which the second modification of the lending control during the payout control is applied, a winning occurs during the lending operation, and after the lending operation is completed, BRDY on is detected, and again If there is a possibility that a lending request is detected, the lending operation based on the lending request is preferentially executed while the BRDY on is detected. After the BRDY off is detected, that is, a series of After the lending control is finished, the payout operation is executed. After detecting the payout request, the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request is paid out regardless of whether the payout is based on the payout operation or the payout based on the lending operation. At this point, the game control unit 41 is notified that the payout of the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request has been completed, and the pachinko balls can be taken in to set the number of bets for the next game. Speed up the game It is possible to progress to.

  Further, in the slot machine to which the first modified example or the second modified example of the lending control during the payout control is applied, in addition to the payout counter described above, a part of the storage area of the RAM 61c of the payout control unit 61, Regardless of whether or not the lending operation is being performed, when a payout request is detected from the game control unit 41, the payout payout counter 1 in which the number of pachinko balls requested for payout is stored, and the lending operation And a payout payout counter 2 in which the number of pachinko balls requested to be paid out when the payout request is detected from the game control unit 41 during execution is provided, of which a payout payout counter The value of 1 is decremented by 1 every time a payout of a pachinko ball is detected regardless of whether the payout is based on a payout operation or a payout operation, and the value of the payout payout counter 1 becomes 0. Movement Medium signal is turned off, so that the payout operation based on the payout request to the game control unit 41 has been completed is notified, it is possible to perform the notification at an accurate timing. Furthermore, since the CPU 41a of the game control unit 41 detects the off-operation signal, it is allowed to take pachinko balls for setting the number of bets in the next game. Can be tolerated. When the value of the winning payout counter 2 is not 0 after the lending operation is completed, that is, when a payout request is detected during execution of the lending operation, the value of the winning payout counter 2 is stored in the payout counter, and the payout operation is performed. Thus, the payout of the number of pachinko balls required by the payout request can be completed with certainty.

  In the embodiment, the detection signal from the supply ball detection switch 205 is input only to the payout control unit 61, and the CPU 61a executes payout when the settlement request signal or the payout request signal is input. The supply ball detection switch 205 confirms whether or not the pachinko ball necessary for the payout is waiting before the payout, and if the supply is not supplied, the payout operation is not executed. A detection signal from the detection switch 205 is input to both the payout control unit 61 and the game control unit 41, and when a winning accompanied with payout of a prize ball occurs or before requesting the payout control unit 61 for payout by settlement. The CPU 41a checks whether or not a pachinko ball necessary for payout is waiting by the supply ball detection switch 205, and if it is not supplied, a settlement request signal or payout required May be configured not to output a signal, by doing so, since the CPU41a is need not output the unwanted signal, it is possible to effectively reduce the control load.

  In the above embodiment, the game control unit 41 that controls the game and the payout control unit 61 that controls the payout and the lending are separately provided. However, the game control unit 41 performs the payout in addition to the game control. Control may be performed. In addition, the pachinko ball take-in control is performed by the game control unit 41, but the payout control unit 61 controls the take-in or separately provides a control unit for take-in control. You may make it control taking-in.

  In the above embodiment, the payout control board 60 and the card unit 400 are connected via the connection terminal board 70, but the game control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 pays out in addition to the game control. The game control board 40 and the card unit 400 may be connected directly or via the connection terminal board 70 or the like.

  Further, in the embodiment, the CPU 41a updates the value indicated by the ball number signal to the number of unpaid balls, and turns on the payout request signal, thereby paying out the payout controller 61 for the number of unpaid balls. Although a request is made, that is, the payout request signal in the present invention is output as a parallel signal, payout requests for the number of unpaid balls may be output by a serial signal. Further, the CPU 41a updates the value indicated by the ball count signal to the number of unsettled balls, and turns on the settlement request signal to make a settlement request for the number of unsettled balls to the payout control unit 61. However, it is also possible to output a settlement request for the number of unsettled balls by serial signals.

  In the embodiment, the CPU 61a turns on the operation signal to notify the game control unit 41 of the start of the payout operation (payout control) based on the payout request (payment request) and perform the payout operation. While the operation signal is kept on, the game control unit 41 is notified that the payout operation (payout control) is in progress, and the payout operation (payout) is performed by turning off the in-operation signal. The game control unit 41 is notified that the control has ended. That is, the payout control start signal, the payout control in-progress signal, and the payout control end signal in the present invention are output as one type of pulse signal, but the pulse signals corresponding to each signal may be output separately. However, these signals may be output as parallel signals. Further, each of these signals may be output as a serial signal. For example, when a payout operation (payout control) is started, information indicating that the payout operation (payout control) is started is output as a serial signal. Sends out information indicating that the payout operation (payout control) is in progress periodically by a serial signal during the payout operation (payout control), and when the payout operation (payout control) ends, the payout operation Information indicating that (payout control) has ended may be transmitted as a serial signal.

  In the above embodiment, the slot machine 1 is used in connection with the card unit 400. However, the slot machine 1 can be used alone without being connected to the lending device such as the card unit 400. It may be a thing.

  Each element in the embodiment corresponds to the present invention as follows.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1 of the present invention,
A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable;
A take-in device (take-in device 100) for taking in a player-owned game ball (pachinko ball);
A take-in request operation unit (1BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6) which is operated when requesting to take in game balls;
When the capture request operation unit is operated, capture control means for performing capture control (capture control processing) for causing the capture device to perform a capture operation for capturing the game ball by the capture device ( CPU 41a)
Bet number setting means (BET processing by the CPU 41a) for setting the bet number in accordance with the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) for one game by the betting number setting means, and the display result of the variable display device is derived for one game. Is a slot machine (slot machine 1) using a game ball in which a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Consists of a microcomputer having an interrupt input terminal (trigger terminal CLK / TRG) that generates an external interrupt (interrupt 2) when a signal is input, and a normal input terminal (signal input terminal DATA). A main control board (game control board 40) equipped with main control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
A sub-control board (production control board 90) equipped with sub-control means (sub-control unit 91) for controlling the production based on reception of the control information (command) transmitted from the main control means;
The state of a predetermined power (+ 25V) used in the slot machine using the game ball is monitored, and when a power interruption condition related to the power supply being cut off is satisfied (when it becomes + 18V or less) An interruption detection means (an interruption detection circuit 48) for outputting an interruption signal (voltage drop signal);
A relay board (production relay board 80) for connecting the main control board and the sub control board in a communicable manner;
With
The power interruption detection means outputs the power interruption signal to both the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal of the microcomputer,
The main control means includes
A storage means for storing data in a readable and writable manner and capable of holding data stored in the storage area even when power supply is stopped; Work area (important work, general work, special work, set value work, unsaved work) in which data for operating the microcomputer constituting the means is stored, and the microcomputer constituting the main control means operate Main data storage means (RAM 41c) to which at least an unused area where data for reading and writing is not read and written is assigned,
Initialization means for initializing at least a part of the storage area in the main data storage means (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a);
Main control state return processing for executing main control state return processing (register return) for returning the control state of the main control means based on the data stored in the main data storage means when the main control means is activated Means (start-up processing by the CPU 41a);
Timer interrupt process execution means (timer interrupt process by the CPU 41a) for interrupting a process being executed every predetermined unit time (0.56 ms) and executing a timer interrupt process;
Input state of operation detection means (switches such as 1 BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) for detecting the player's operation, the processing executed in the timer interruption processing A process selecting means for selecting from a plurality of types including a process (port input process) for storing input information indicating the input state in the main data storage means (port input process) according to the number of times of execution of the timer interrupt process Selection of timer interrupts 1 to 4 by the CPU 41a),
In response to the occurrence of the external interrupt, a power interruption process (for RAM parity adjustment) for enabling the main control state return processing means to return the control state of the main control means to normal when the main control means is activated. Power interruption interrupt processing execution means (power interruption interrupt processing by the CPU 41a) for executing power interruption interruption processing including calculation and storage of data, setting of data for destruction diagnosis),
Multiple interrupt prohibition means (interrupt prohibition during interrupt processing) for prohibiting the other interrupt processing during execution of one of the timer interrupt processing or the interrupt processing at power interruption,
The input information stored in the timer interrupt process is read, and a basic process for controlling one game is executed by gradually shifting a plurality of control states according to the progress of the game based on the read input information. Basic processing execution means (basic processing by the CPU 41a),
Control information generating means (command storage processing by the CPU 41a) for generating the control information according to the progress of the game in the basic processing;
Control information transmitting means (command transmission processing by the CPU 41a) for transmitting control information generated by the control information generating means to the sub-control means by processing executed in the timer interrupt processing;
Including
The sub-control means (sub-control unit 91)
Sub-data storage means (RAM 91c) capable of storing data for operation by the sub-control means so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding the stored data even when power supply is stopped;
When the sub-control unit is activated, a sub-control state return process (return of the control pattern at the time of power interruption) is executed based on the data stored in the sub-data storage unit. Sub-control state return processing means (start-up processing (sub) by the CPU 91a);
Periodic processing (setting of data for parity adjustment) including processing for allowing the sub-control state return processing means to return the control state of the sub-control means to normal when the sub-control means is started up for a predetermined unit time Periodic process execution means (timer interrupt process (sub) by the CPU 91a) executed every (1.12 ms);
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused area in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game (every game ends),
The interruption processing execution means at the time of power interruption
When the external interrupt occurs at the same time as the interrupt timing (interrupt 3) of the timer interrupt process, the power interruption interrupt process associated with the external interrupt generation takes priority over the timer interrupt process. And run
When the external interrupt occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption is executed after the timer interrupt process being executed is completed,
The normal input terminal is monitored in the interruption processing at the time of power interruption, and it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is input (input determination of a voltage drop signal in the power interruption interrupt processing). When it is determined that the power interruption signal is input, the power interruption process is performed. When it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the power interruption process is not performed. To return to the interrupt source process,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 2 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1,
The storage area of the main data storage means (RAM 41c) temporarily stores data in addition to the work area (important work, general work, special work, set value work, non-saved work) and the unused area. Stack space that can be
The main control means (main control unit 41)
Data saving means for saving data in use by the main control means to the stack area (saving of registers by the CPU 41a);
Data restoring means (restoring of the register by the CPU 41a) for restoring the data saved in the stack area by the saving means as data used by the main control means;
Unused stack area specifying means (calculating the size of the unused area from the stack pointer by the CPU 41a) for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Including
The initialization means (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a) is performed in addition to the unused area in the storage area of the main data storage means in addition to the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means for each game ( Initialize every game)
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 3 of the present invention,
A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable;
A take-in device (take-in device 100) for taking in a player-owned game ball (pachinko ball);
A take-in request operation unit (1BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6) which is operated when requesting to take in game balls;
When the capture request operation unit is operated, capture control means for performing capture control (capture control processing) for causing the capture device to perform a capture operation for capturing the game ball by the capture device ( CPU 41a)
Bet number setting means (BET processing by the CPU 41a) for setting the bet number in accordance with the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets (1 or 3) for one game by the betting number setting means, and the display result of the variable display device is derived for one game. Is a slot machine (slot machine 1) using a game ball in which a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Consists of a microcomputer having an interrupt input terminal (trigger terminal CLK / TRG) that generates an external interrupt (interrupt 2) when a signal is input, and a normal input terminal (signal input terminal DATA). A main control board (game control board 40) equipped with main control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
A sub-control board (production control board 90) equipped with sub-control means (sub-control unit 91) for controlling the production based on reception of the control information (command) transmitted from the main control means;
The state of a predetermined power (+ 25V) used in the slot machine using the game ball is monitored, and when a power interruption condition related to the power supply being cut off is satisfied (when it becomes + 18V or less) An interruption detection means (an interruption detection circuit 48) for outputting an interruption signal (voltage drop signal);
A relay board (production relay board 80) for connecting the main control board and the sub control board in a communicable manner;
With
The power interruption detection means outputs the power interruption signal to both the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal of the microcomputer,
The main control means includes
A storage means for storing data in a readable and writable manner and capable of holding the data stored in the storage area even when power supply is stopped; and the main control as the storage area Work area (important work, general work, special work, set value work, unsaved work) in which data for operating the microcomputer constituting the means is stored, and data can be temporarily stored A main data storage means (RAM 41c) to which at least a stack area is allocated;
Data saving means for saving data in use by the main control means to the stack area (saving of registers by the CPU 41a);
Data restoring means (restoring of the register by the CPU 41a) for restoring the data saved in the stack area by the saving means as data used by the main control means;
Unused stack area specifying means (calculating the size of the unused area from the stack pointer by the CPU 41a) for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Initialization means for initializing at least a part of the storage area in the main data storage means (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a);
Main control state return processing for executing main control state return processing (register return) for returning the control state of the main control means based on the data stored in the main data storage means when the main control means is activated Means (start-up processing by the CPU 41a);
Timer interrupt process execution means (timer interrupt process by the CPU 41a) for interrupting a process being executed every predetermined unit time (0.56 ms) and executing a timer interrupt process;
Input state of operation detection means (switches such as 1 BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) for detecting the player's operation, the processing executed in the timer interruption processing A process selecting means for selecting from a plurality of types including a process (port input process) for storing input information indicating the input state in the main data storage means (port input process) according to the number of times of execution of the timer interrupt process Selection of timer interrupts 1 to 4 by the CPU 41a),
In response to the occurrence of the external interrupt, a power interruption process (for RAM parity adjustment) for enabling the main control state return processing means to return the control state of the main control means to normal when the main control means is activated. Power interruption interruption processing execution means (electric interruption interruption processing by the CPU 41a) for executing interruption interruption processing including calculation and storage of data, and setting of data for destruction diagnosis),
Multiple interrupt prohibition means (interrupt prohibition during interrupt processing) for prohibiting the other interrupt processing during execution of one of the timer interrupt processing or the interrupt processing at power interruption,
The input information stored in the timer interrupt process is read, and a basic process for controlling one game is executed by gradually shifting a plurality of control states according to the progress of the game based on the read input information. Basic processing execution means (basic processing by the CPU 41a),
Control information generating means (command storage processing by the CPU 41a) for generating the control information according to the progress of the game in the basic processing;
Control information transmitting means (command transmission processing by the CPU 41a) for transmitting control information generated by the control information generating means to the sub-control means by processing executed in the timer interrupt processing;
Including
The sub-control means (sub-control unit 91)
Sub-data storage means (RAM 91c) capable of storing data for operation by the sub-control means so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding the stored data even when power supply is stopped;
When the sub-control unit is activated, a sub-control state return process (return of the control pattern at the time of power interruption) is executed based on the data stored in the sub-data storage unit. Sub-control state return processing means (start-up processing (sub) by the CPU 91a);
Periodic processing (setting of data for parity adjustment) including processing for allowing the sub-control state return processing means to return the control state of the sub-control means to normal when the sub-control means is started up for a predetermined unit time Periodic process execution means (timer interrupt process (sub) by the CPU 91a) executed every (1.12 ms);
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game (every game ends);
The interruption processing execution means at the time of power interruption
When the external interrupt occurs at the same time as the interrupt timing (interrupt 3) of the timer interrupt process, the power interruption interrupt process associated with the external interrupt generation takes priority over the timer interrupt process. And run
When the external interrupt occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption is executed after the timer interrupt process being executed is completed,
The normal input terminal is monitored in the interruption processing at the time of power interruption, and it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is input (input determination of a voltage drop signal in the power interruption interrupt processing). When it is determined that the power interruption signal is input, the power interruption process is performed. When it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the power interruption process is not performed. To return to the interrupt source process,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The initialization means (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a) is one of a plurality of types of initialization conditions (before starting setting, at the end of a big bonus, when the power is turned on and when the RAM 41c is not broken, at the end of one game) When the initialization condition is satisfied, the region (FIG. 21 (a)) corresponding to the established initialization condition type is initialized, regardless of the established initialization condition type. The unused area and / or the unused stack area in the storage area of the main data storage means (RAM 41c) must be initialized.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 5 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4,
The main data storage means (RAM 41c) is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization means (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a) is an initialization in the main data storage means corresponding to two or more kinds of initialization conditions (before setting, at the end of the big bonus, at the end of the game). Initialization area setting means (initialization table of ROM 41b (FIG. 87 (b))) in which a start address (start address) is set and an initialization end address (end address) common to the initialization conditions is set. In addition, when the initialization condition is satisfied, each address from the initialization start address set to the initialization area setting means to the initialization end address corresponding to the type of the initialization condition is assigned Initialize the storage area,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 6 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 4 or 5,
The main data storage means (RAM 41c) is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization means (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a) corresponds to the type of initialization condition (before starting setting, at the end of the big bonus, when the power is turned on and when the RAM 41c is not broken and at the end of one game). Initialization area setting means (initialization table of the ROM 41b) in which the initialization start address (start address) in the main data storage means and the size (initialization size) of the storage area initialized with respect to the initialization start address are set. (FIG. 21B), when the initialization condition is satisfied, the initialization address is changed from the initialization start address set in the initialization area setting means corresponding to the type of the initialization condition. Initialize the storage area of the size set for
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 7 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The main control unit (main control unit 41) prohibits all interrupt processing during initialization of the storage area of the main data storage unit (RAM 41c) by the initialization unit (initialization of the RAM 41c by the CPU 41a). Including interrupt processing prohibition means (interrupt prohibition during initialization),
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 8 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
All data calculation means (CPU 41a) for calculating data in all storage areas including the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the main data storage means (RAM 41c) by a predetermined calculation method (exclusive OR) RAM parity calculation)
The power interruption interrupt processing execution means (power interruption interrupt processing by the CPU 41a) is for adjusting the calculation result (RAM parity) by the all data calculation means in the power interruption processing to a specific value (0). Calculating data (parity adjustment data), and storing the calculated adjustment data in the main data storage unit;
The main control state return processing means (start-up process by the CPU 41a) determines whether or not the calculation result by the all-data calculation means is the specific value when the main control means is started, and the calculation result by the all-data calculation means The main control state return process (register return) is executed on the condition that is determined to be the specific value.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 9 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The microcomputer constituting the main control means (main control unit 41) can generate a plurality of types of interrupts (interrupts 1 to 4).
The main control means executes an unused interrupt process for executing an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the process before the interrupt when an unused interrupt (interrupt 1) occurs among the plurality of types of interrupts. Including an interrupt processing execution means (unused interrupt processing by the CPU 41a),
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The main control means (game control unit 41)
Before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived, a small winning combination (small role) accompanied by a game ball and a special winning (special role) accompanied by a change in gaming state are included. A pre-determining means (internal lottery process by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of predetermined types of winnings;
Before making the determination by the pre-determining means, numerical data updated in a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing is determined as determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery) for each game. Numerical data input means for inputting to (acquisition of random numbers by the CPU 41a),
For the plurality of types of winnings, a range of determination values that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area is determined. Range specifying data storage means (role-specific table (FIG. 83)) for storing the specified range specifying data (storage address of the number of judgment values);
Including
The range specifying data storage means can specify, as the range specifying data, overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that are determined to allow the occurrence of both the special prize and the small prize winning at the same time ( Storage address of the number of judgment values of big bonus + cherry, big bonus + watermelon)
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit includes the determination numerical data input to the determination region. Including an allowance determining means (winning determination of a winning combination) for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and allowing an occurrence of a winning determined to be permitted by the allowance determining means Decide to do,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball of the present invention is the slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10,
The main control means (main control unit 41) is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role) by the prior determination means (internal lottery process by the CPU 41a), and the determination (special role winning flag) ) Further includes a decision carry-over means (carrying over the winning flag by the CPU 41a) for carrying over the decision after the next game when a special prize that is allowed to be generated does not occur.
The allowance determining means (winning determination of the winning combination) is the determination numerical data (internal lottery) input to the determination area when the decision carryover means has carried over the determination to allow the occurrence of the special prize. Random number) is determined by the overlapping range specifying data (the storage address of the number of determination values of big bonus + cherry, big bonus + watermelon) stored in the range specifying data storage means (the role-specific table (FIG. 58)). When it is included in the range of the specified determination value, the fact that only the small prize winning (cherry, watermelon) is allowed, or the special prize and the small prize winning are not allowed (losing) It is determined that
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball of the present invention is the slot machine using the game ball according to claim 10,
The main control means (main control unit 41) is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role) by the prior determination means (internal lottery process by the CPU 41a), and the determination (special role winning flag) ) Further includes a decision carry-over means (carrying over the winning flag by the CPU 41a) for carrying over the decision after the next game when a special prize that is allowed to be generated does not occur.
The range specifying data storage means (role-specific table)
As the range specifying data, there is stored first overlapping range specifying data capable of specifying a range of determination values for determining that both the special winning and the small winning combination (small winning) are allowed to occur simultaneously. Range specifying data storage means (for example, a role-specific table in which addresses of storage areas for the number of determination values for which both small roles and special roles are determined to be winning) are stored;
As the range specifying data, a second range specifying data storage means (for example, storing only range specifying data that can specify the range of the determination value that determines whether to allow the generation of a prize other than the special prize is permitted) A role-specific table in which only the address of the storage area for the number of judgment values for which a small role or re-playing role is determined to be won is stored;
Including
The allowance determining means (the winning combination determination) is
In the case where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the decision carry-over means (before the special combination is established), it is specified by the range specifying data stored in the first range specifying data storage means. Whether or not it indicates that the winning is allowed to be generated, depending on whether or not the range of determination values includes the numerical data for determination input in the determination area,
In the case where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carryover means (after the special role is established), it is specified by the range specifying data stored in the second range specifying data storage means. It is determined whether or not it indicates that the occurrence of the winning is permitted depending on whether or not the range of the determination value includes the numerical data for determination input in the determination area,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 11 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The main control means (game control unit 41)
Before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived, a small winning combination (small role) accompanied by a game ball and a special winning (special role) accompanied by a change in gaming state are included. A pre-determining means (internal lottery process by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of predetermined types of winnings;
Before making the determination by the pre-determining means, numerical data updated in a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing is determined as determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery) for each game. Numerical data input means for inputting to (acquisition of random numbers by the CPU 41a),
With respect to the small role winning, it is determined so that a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of numerical data for determination input in the determination area can be specified. Small range winning range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data (storage address of the number of judgment values for the small role)
The special prize is determined so that the range of determination values that the predetermination means determines to allow for the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area can be specified. Special winning range specifying data storage means (special role-specific table) for storing range specifying data (storage address of the number of judgment values for special roles);
Including
A determination value range that will determine that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the special prize is a determination that determines that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning. Including a range of judgment values (big bonus-A, big bonus-C judgment value ranges) overlapping with the value range,
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the judgment value range specified by the range specifying data stored in the small role winning range specifying data storage means includes the determination numerical data input to the determination area, A small role winning allowance determining means for determining whether or not to permit the occurrence (winning determination of the small role and re-playing role),
Does the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage means include the same numerical value data for determination as used by the small prize winning allowance determining means for determination? A special winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not to allow the occurrence of the special winning according to whether or not (special winning combination judgment),
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the small role winning permission determining means and the special winning permission determining means,
When it is determined that both the small role winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, it is determined that the occurrence of both the small winning a prize and the special winning is permitted. To
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using a game ball of the present invention is a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 11,
The main control means (main control unit 41) is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role) by the prior determination means (internal lottery process by the CPU 41a), and the determination (special role winning flag) ) Further includes a decision carry-over means (carrying over the winning flag by the CPU 41a) for carrying over the decision after the next game when a special prize that is allowed to be generated does not occur.
The pre-determining means includes
If the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over by the decision carryover means (before the special role is established), the small role winning permission judgment means (winning judgment of the small role and replaying role) and It is determined whether or not both of the special winning allowance determining means (special role winning determination) indicate that the winning is permitted.
In the case where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carry-over means (after the special role is established), it indicates that the occurrence of a prize is permitted only by the small role prize acceptance judging means Determine whether or not
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using a game ball of the present invention is a slot machine using a game ball according to claim 11,
The main control means (main control unit 41) is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role) by the prior determination means (internal lottery process by the CPU 41a), and the determination (special role winning flag) ) Further includes a decision carry-over means (carrying over the winning flag by the CPU 41a) for carrying over the decision after the next game when a special prize that is allowed to be generated does not occur.
The pre-determining means includes
Regardless of whether or not the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the decision carryover means, the small prize winning allowance judging means (winning judgment of the small part and replaying game) and the special winning allowance It is determined whether or not both of the determination means (special role winning determination) indicate that the winning is permitted,
When the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize has been carried over by the decision carryover means (after the special role is established), both the small role prize acceptance judging means and the special prize acceptance judging means When it is determined that the occurrence is permitted, it is determined that the occurrence of only the small prize winning determined that the small prize winning acceptance determining unit indicates that the occurrence is permitted is determined.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 12 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
The main control means (main control unit 41)
Prior determination means (internal by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived. Lottery processing)
Permissible stage setting means (by the CPU 41a) that selects and sets one of the allowable stages (setting values) with different ratios for determining that the pre-determining means permits the occurrence of winning. Setting change processing)
Permissible stage setting in which one of the permissible stages is selected and set from a plurality of permissible stages (setting values) with different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of winning Means (setting change processing by the CPU 41a);
Before making the determination by the pre-determining means, numerical data updated in a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing is determined as determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery) for each game. Numerical data input means for inputting to (acquisition of random numbers by the CPU 41a),
A determination value indicating the number of determination values (the number of determination values) that is determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-determining unit for the determination numerical data input to the determination area for any winning Data (stored address of the number of judgment values) is stored in common for the plurality of allowable stages (for example, cherry, watermelon), and a prize for which judgment value data is not stored in common for the allowable stage, Determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-determining unit for the determination numerical data input to the determination area, according to the type of the allowable stage Individually stored (for example, bell, regular bonus (1)) determination value data storage means (role-specific table);
Including
The pre-determining means is the determination numerical data input to the determination area in accordance with the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means corresponding to the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means. Including an allowance determination means (winning determination of a winning combination) for determining whether or not the occurrence of the winning is permitted, and determining whether the winning is determined to be permitted by the allowance determining means. Decide to allow the occurrence,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 13 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to claim 12,
The judgment value data storage means (role-specific table) has different numbers of judgment values (number of judgment values) as judgment value data (storage addresses for the number of judgment values) stored individually according to the type of the allowable stage (setting value). ) And the same number determination value data (regular number) indicating the same number of determination values as the determination value data stored separately according to the type of the permissible stage. A storage address of the number of judgment values of bonus (1)) according to the type of winning,
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 14 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The main control means (main control unit 41)
Prior determination means (internal by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived. Lottery processing)
Before making the determination by the pre-determining means, numerical data updated in a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing is determined as determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery) for each game. Numerical data input means for inputting to (acquisition of random numbers by the CPU 41a),
A determination indicating the number of determination values (the number of determination values) that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the determination numerical data input to the determination area for the plurality of types of winnings Determination value data storage means (role-specific table) for storing value data (storage address of the number of determination values);
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means,
The slot machine (slot machine 1) using the game ball is:
A pulse generation circuit (pulse generation circuit 42a) for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit (lower counter 42b, upper counter 42c) that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit (sampling circuit 43) for outputting
Input means for inputting n-bit array data signals output from the latch circuit as n-bit numerical data without changing the bit array order in a specific area different from the determination area (random number generation to the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a) 16-bit data signal output from the circuit 42),
Further comprising
The numerical data input means includes specific bit data (upper 8-bit data) of n-bit numerical data input to the specific area, and other bits of data (lower 8). Bit data) is exchanged, and the exchanged n-bit numeric data is input to the determination area as the numeric data for determination.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 15 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The main control means (main control unit 41)
Prior determination means (internal by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived. Lottery processing)
Before making the determination by the pre-determining means, numerical data updated in a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing is determined as determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery) for each game. Numerical data input means for inputting to (acquisition of random numbers by the CPU 41a),
A determination indicating the number of determination values (the number of determination values) that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the determination numerical data input to the determination area for the plurality of types of winnings Determination value data storage means (role-specific table) for storing value data (storage address of the number of determination values);
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means,
The slot machine (slot machine 1) using the game ball is:
A pulse generation circuit (pulse generation circuit 42a) for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit (lower counter 42b, upper counter 42c) that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit (sampling circuit 43) for outputting
Input means (to the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a) for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit as the first numerical data of n bits without changing the bit array order in a specific area different from the determination area. A 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42), and
Numerical value updating means (refresh register 41R) for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Numerical value extraction means (extraction of the value of the refresh register 41R by the CPU 41a) for extracting the second numerical data updated by the numerical value update means when the predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical data extracted by the numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k) is used. Computing means (adding a processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R to the value of the high-order byte of the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a);
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs the operation result numerical data composed of the upper k bits and the lower j bits after the operation by the operation means to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 16 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The main control means (main control unit 41)
Prior determination means (internal by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived. Lottery processing)
Before making the determination by the pre-determining means, numerical data updated in a predetermined range (0 to 16383) at a predetermined timing is determined as determination numerical data (random number for internal lottery) for each game. Numerical data input means for inputting to (acquisition of random numbers by the CPU 41a),
A determination indicating the number of determination values (the number of determination values) that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the determination numerical data input to the determination area for the plurality of types of winnings Determination value data storage means (role-specific table) for storing value data (storage address of the number of determination values);
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination means,
The slot machine (slot machine 1) using the game ball is:
A pulse generation circuit (pulse generation circuit 42a) for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit (lower counter 42b, upper counter 42c) that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit (sampling circuit 43) for outputting
Input means (to the general-purpose register 41GR by the CPU 41a) for inputting the n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit as the first numerical data of n bits without changing the bit array order in a specific area different from the determination area. A 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42), and
First numerical value updating means (refresh register 41R) for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Second numerical value updating means (refresh register 41R) for updating third numerical data different from the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
First numerical value extraction means for extracting second numerical data from the first numerical value update means (extraction of the value of the refresh register 41R by the CPU 41a) when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
Second numerical value extraction means for extracting third numerical data from the second numerical value update means (extraction of the value of the refresh register 41R by the CPU 41a) when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical value extracted by the first numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k). Arithmetic means for performing a predetermined operation using data and performing a predetermined operation using the third numerical value data extracted by the second numerical value extraction means for the lower j bits (the upper byte of the general register 41GR by the CPU 41a) And addition of a processing random number extracted from the refresh register 41R to the value of the lower byte),
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs arithmetic result numerical data consisting of upper k bits after the operation by the arithmetic means and lower j bits after the operation to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 17 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
The control information transmission means (command transmission processing by the CPU 41a) prohibits transmission of new control information until a predetermined transmission restriction time (4.48 ms) elapses after transmission of the control information (command).
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 18 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
The power interruption detection means (power interruption detection circuit 48) includes monitoring voltage generation means (voltage generation circuit 303) that generates a monitoring voltage to be monitored as the state of the predetermined power (+ 25V),
The power interruption detection means monitors the monitoring voltage, and outputs the power interruption signal (voltage drop signal) when the monitoring voltage becomes a predetermined value (+ 18V) or less,
The slot machine using the game ball (slot machine 1) has power supply voltages (+ 24V, + 12V (VCC), + 12V, + 5V) supplied to electrical components mounted on the slot machine using the game ball. Power supply voltage generation means (voltage generation circuits 305 to 308) for generating separately from the monitoring voltage is further provided.
It is characterized by that.

A slot machine using the game ball according to claim 19 of the present invention is a slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
The slot machine (slot machine 1) using the game ball has at least the control information transmitting means (from the time when the power interruption signal (voltage drop signal) is output by the power interruption detection means (power interruption detection circuit 48). The sub-control unit is driven for a time (20 ms) that is equal to or longer than the interval (2.24 ms) of the timer interrupt process (timer interrupt 2) for executing the process of transmitting the control information (command) by the command transmission process by the CPU 41a. Sub-drive power supply maintaining means (capacitor 309 of the power supply substrate 100) for maintaining the minimum power supply (+ 7V) necessary for the
It is characterized by that.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a top view which shows the operation console provided in the slot machine. It is a rear view of the slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the connection condition of a game control board and a payout control board. It is sectional drawing of the taking-in apparatus provided in the slot machine. It is sectional drawing of the taking-in apparatus provided in the slot machine. It is AA sectional drawing of the taking-in apparatus shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the payout apparatus provided in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the signal exchanged between a game control board, a payout control board, and a payout control board and a card unit. It is a circuit diagram for demonstrating the structure of a power supply board. (A) is a circuit diagram for demonstrating the structure around the game control part in a game control board. (B) is a circuit diagram for explaining a configuration around an effect control unit in the effect control board. (A) is a figure which shows the combination table according to gaming state. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table for a small combination and a re-game combination. (C) is a role-specific table for special roles. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. (A) (b) is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the number of judgment values of each combination, and the winning combination. It is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the number of determination values of each combination, and the winning combination. (A) is a figure which shows the example of the relationship between a winning combination and the value of the random number for internal lottery, the number of judgment values of each combination, and a regular bonus of a small role game. (A) is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a random number generation circuit. (B) is explanatory drawing until a CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is a figure which shows the structure of the storage area of RAM of a game control part. (A) is a figure which shows the area | region initialized in initialization 1-4 performed by CPU of a game control part. (B) is a figure which shows the initialization table stored in ROM of the game control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the command transmitted with respect to an effect control board from a game control board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the command queue set to RAM of a game control part. It is a timing chart which shows the generation situation of timer interruption processing (A) which CPU of a game control part performs. (A) (b) is a timing chart which shows an example of the transmission condition of the command by CPU of a game control part. It is a timing chart which shows the fall state of each voltage at the time of a power failure, and the operation state of CPU of a game control part and an effect control part. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when the operation | movement of a payment switch is detected when the prize accompanying payout of a prize ball | bowl generate | occur | produces, or the state where a taken-in ball | bowl remains. (A) (b) is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when an error generate | occur | produces during a payout request or a payment request. (A) (b) is a timing chart which shows the modification of the operation | movement condition when an error generate | occur | produces in the payout request | requirement or the adjustment request | requirement. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition when a lending process is performed by the card unit 400 in connection with the operation of a ball lending switch being detected. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement condition at the time of winning a prize accompanying payout of a prize ball during execution of a lending operation. 10 is a timing chart showing an operation situation when a lending process is performed by the card unit 400 in association with detection of a ball lending switch during execution of a prize ball payout operation. When the operation of one-ball take-in switch or MAXBET switch is detected and take-in control (take-in control process) is performed, or the operation of the check-out switch 10 is detected, and pay-out control (pay-out control process) is performed. It is a timing chart which shows the operation condition in case. It is a timing chart which shows the operation condition at the time of the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 being cut off during BET processing. It is a timing chart which shows the operation condition at the time of the connection between the card unit 400 and the payout control board 60 being cut off during BET processing. (A) (b) is a timing chart which shows an example of the lighting condition of residual sphere notification LED114. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a game control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process which CPU of a game control part performs when an error generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a game control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a game control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the payment request process which CPU of a game control part performs in a payment control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the taking-in control process which CPU of a game control part performs in a BET process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number acquisition process which CPU of a game control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the prize ball provision process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the payout request process which CPU of a game control part performs in a prize ball provision process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 1 which CPU of a game control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the RAM clear process which CPU of a game control part performs in initialization 1-4. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 2 which CPU of a game control part performs at the time of the end of a big bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 3 which CPU of a game control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 4 which CPU of a game control part performs every completion | finish of 1 game. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (A) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command storage process performed when CPU of a game control part produces | generates a command and stores it in a command queue. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command transmission process which CPU of a game control part performs in a timer interruption process (A). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (B) which CPU of a game control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a game control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command reception interruption process performed when CPU of an effect control part inputs a strobe (INT) signal from a game control board. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (effect) which CPU of an effect control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (payout) which CPU of the payout control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (payout) which CPU of the payout control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the connection confirmation process which CPU of a payout control part performs in the step of Sn2. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main board | substrate communication process which CPU of the payout control part performs in the step of Sn3. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main board | substrate communication process 1 which CPU of the payout control part performs in the step of Sn302. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main board | substrate communication process 2 which CPU of the payout control part performs in step of Sn303. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main board | substrate communication process 3 which CPU of the payout control part performs in the step of Sn304. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the lending control process which CPU of a payout control part performs in the step of Sn4. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the lending communication process 1 which CPU of a payout control part performs in step of Sn402. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the lending communication process 2 which CPU of the payout control part performs in step of Sn403. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the lending communication process 3 which CPU of the payout control part performs in the step of Sn404. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the lending communication process 4 which CPU of a payout control part performs in the step of Sn405. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed control content of the payout control process which CPU of the payout control part performs in the step of Sn5. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the payout start waiting process which CPU of the payout control part performs in step of Sn504. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the payout stop waiting process which CPU of a payout control part performs in step of Sn505. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the payout passage waiting process which CPU of a payout control part performs in step of Sn506. It is a figure which shows the modification of a table classified by role. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the internal lottery process which CPU of a game control part performs in a game process. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd modification of the process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. (A) is a figure which shows the modification of the storage area of RAM in a game control part. (B) is a figure which shows the modification of an initialization table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the initialization 1 which CPU of a game control part performs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the signal exchanged between a game control board and a payout control board, and a payout control board and a card unit. It is a block diagram showing an outline of a slot machine to which a first modification and a second modification of lending control during payout control are applied. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a modified example of an operation situation when a winning with a payout of a prize ball occurs during execution of a lending operation in a slot machine to which a first modified example of lending control during payout control is applied. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a modified example of an operation situation when a winning with a payout of a winning ball occurs during execution of a lending operation in a slot machine to which a second modified example of lending control during payout control is applied.

Explanation of symbols

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 40 game control board 41 game control unit 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
42 random number generation circuit 43 sampling circuit 48 power interruption detection circuit 60 payout control board 61 payout control unit 61a CPU
61b ROM
61c RAM
80 Production Relay Board 90 Production Control Board 91 Production Control Unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (19)

A variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified;
A take-in device for taking in a player-owned game ball;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to perform an take-in operation for taking in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and one game is ended by deriving the display result of the variable display device. A slot machine using a game ball that can be awarded according to the display result of the variable display device,
A main control board, which is composed of a microcomputer having an interrupt input terminal that generates an external interrupt when a signal is input, and a normal input terminal, and on which main control means for controlling a game is mounted;
A sub control board equipped with sub control means for controlling the production based on reception of control information transmitted from the main control means;
Power interruption detection means for monitoring a state of predetermined power used in the slot machine using the game ball and outputting a power interruption signal when a power interruption condition related to the interruption of power supply is established; ,
A relay board for communicably connecting the main control board and the sub control board;
With
The power interruption detection means outputs the power interruption signal to both the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal of the microcomputer,
The main control means includes
A storage means for storing data in a readable and writable manner and capable of holding data stored in the storage area even when power supply is stopped; A work area in which data for operating the microcomputer constituting the means is stored, and an unused area in which data for operating the microcomputer constituting the main control means is not read or written And main data storage means assigned at least,
Initialization means for initializing at least a part of the storage area in the main data storage means;
Main control state return processing means for executing main control state return processing for returning the control state of the main control means based on data stored in the main data storage means when the main control means is activated;
Timer interrupt processing execution means for interrupting a process being executed every predetermined unit time and executing a timer interrupt process;
A plurality of types of processing executed in the timer interrupt processing, including processing for monitoring the input state of the operation detecting means for detecting the player's operation and storing the input information indicating the input state in the main data storage means A process selecting means for selecting the timer interrupt process according to the number of executions,
Upon power interruption including power interruption processing for enabling the main control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the main control means upon activation of the main control means in response to the occurrence of the external interrupt Interruption processing execution means for executing interruption processing;
Multiple interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the other interrupt process during the execution of either the timer interrupt process or the power interruption interrupt process,
The input information stored in the timer interrupt process is read, and a basic process for controlling one game is executed by gradually shifting a plurality of control states according to the progress of the game based on the read input information. Basic processing execution means to
Control information generating means for generating the control information according to the progress of the game in the basic processing;
Control information transmitting means for transmitting control information generated by the control information generating means to the sub-control means by processing executed in the timer interrupt processing;
Including
The sub-control means includes
Sub-data storage means capable of storing data for operation by the sub-control means so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding stored data even when power supply is stopped;
Sub-control state return processing means for executing sub-control state return processing for returning the control state of the sub-control means based on data stored in the sub-data storage means when the sub-control means is activated;
Periodic process execution means for executing a periodic process including a process for allowing the sub-control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the sub-control means when the sub-control means is activated. When,
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused area in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game,
The interruption processing execution means at the time of power interruption
When the external interrupt occurs simultaneously with the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption accompanying the generation of the external interrupt is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process,
When the external interrupt occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption is executed after the timer interrupt process being executed is completed,
In the interruption process at the time of power interruption, when the normal input terminal is monitored, it is determined whether the power interruption signal is input, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal The power interruption process is executed, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the interruption process is performed without performing the power interruption process.
A slot machine using game balls characterized by this. A stack area capable of temporarily storing data in addition to the work area and the unused area is allocated to the storage area of the main data storage means,
The main control means includes
Data saving means for saving data in use by the microcomputer to the stack area;
Data restoration means for restoring data saved in the stack area by the saving means as data used by the microcomputer;
An unused stack area specifying means for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means in addition to the unused area in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game.
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 1. A variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified;
A take-in device for taking in a player-owned game ball;
An acquisition request operation unit operated when requesting the acquisition of game balls;
An intake control means for performing an intake control for causing the take-in device to perform an take-in operation for taking in a game ball by the take-in device when the take-in request operation unit is operated;
Bet number setting means for setting the bet number according to the number of game balls taken in by the take-in operation of the take-in device;
With
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game by the betting number setting means, and one game is ended by deriving the display result of the variable display device. A slot machine using a game ball that can be awarded according to the display result of the variable display device,
A main control board, which is composed of a microcomputer having an interrupt input terminal that generates an external interrupt when a signal is input, and a normal input terminal, and on which main control means for controlling a game is mounted;
A sub control board equipped with sub control means for controlling the production based on reception of control information transmitted from the main control means;
Power interruption detection means for monitoring a state of predetermined power used in the slot machine using the game ball and outputting a power interruption signal when a power interruption condition related to the interruption of power supply is established; ,
A relay board for communicably connecting the main control board and the sub control board;
With
The power interruption detection means outputs the power interruption signal to both the interrupt input terminal and the normal input terminal of the microcomputer,
The main control means includes
A storage means for storing data in a readable and writable manner and capable of holding the data stored in the storage area even when power supply is stopped; and the main control as the storage area A main data storage means to which at least a work area in which data for operating a microcomputer constituting the means is stored and a stack area in which data can be temporarily stored are allocated;
Data saving means for saving data in use by the microcomputer to the stack area;
Data restoration means for restoring data saved in the stack area by the saving means as data used by the microcomputer;
An unused stack area specifying means for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Initialization means for initializing at least a part of the storage area in the main data storage means;
Main control state return processing means for executing main control state return processing for returning the control state of the main control means based on data stored in the main data storage means when the main control means is activated;
Timer interrupt process execution means for executing a timer interrupt process for interrupting and executing a process being executed every predetermined unit time; and
A plurality of types of processing executed in the timer interrupt processing, including processing for monitoring the input state of the operation detecting means for detecting the player's operation and storing the input information indicating the input state in the main data storage means A process selecting means for selecting the timer interrupt process according to the number of executions,
Upon power interruption including power interruption processing for enabling the main control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the main control means upon activation of the main control means in response to the occurrence of the external interrupt Interruption processing execution means for executing interruption processing;
Multiple interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the other interrupt process during the execution of either the timer interrupt process or the power interruption interrupt process,
The input information stored in the timer interrupt process is read, and a basic process for controlling one game is executed by gradually shifting a plurality of control states according to the progress of the game based on the read input information. Basic processing execution means to
Control information generating means for generating the control information according to the progress of the game in the basic processing;
Control information transmitting means for transmitting control information generated by the control information generating means to the sub-control means by processing executed in the timer interrupt processing;
Including
The sub-control means includes
Sub-data storage means capable of storing data for operation by the sub-control means so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding stored data even when power supply is stopped;
Sub-control state return processing means for executing sub-control state return processing for returning the control state of the sub-control means based on data stored in the sub-data storage means when the sub-control means is activated;
Periodic process execution means for executing a periodic process including a process for allowing the sub-control state return processing means to normally return the control state of the sub-control means when the sub-control means is activated. When,
Including
The initialization means initializes the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means in the storage area of the main data storage means for each game,
The interruption processing execution means at the time of power interruption
When the external interrupt occurs simultaneously with the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption accompanying the generation of the external interrupt is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process,
When the external interrupt occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process, the interruption process at the time of power interruption is executed after the timer interrupt process being executed is completed,
In the interruption process at the time of power interruption, when the normal input terminal is monitored, it is determined whether the power interruption signal is input, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is input to the normal input terminal The power interruption process is executed, and when it is determined that the power interruption signal is not input to the normal input terminal, the interruption process is performed without performing the power interruption process.
A slot machine using game balls characterized by this. The initialization means initializes an area defined in accordance with the type of initialization condition established when any one of a plurality of types of initialization conditions is established, and Regardless of the type of initialization condition, the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the storage area of the main data storage means must be initialized.
A slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The main data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization means is set with an initialization start address in the main data storage means corresponding to two or more types of initialization conditions, and an initialization end address common to the initialization conditions is set. Including initialization area setting means, and when the initialization condition is satisfied, from the initialization start address set in the initialization area setting means corresponding to the type of the initialization condition to the initialization end address Initialize the storage area to which each address is assigned,
A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 4. The main data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization means is an initialization area setting in which an initialization start address in the main data storage means and a size of a storage area to be initialized with respect to the initialization start address are set corresponding to the type of initialization condition A size set for the initialization address from an initialization start address set in the initialization area setting unit corresponding to the type of the initialization condition when the initialization condition is satisfied. Initialize the storage area of
A slot machine using a game ball according to claim 4 or 5. The main control means includes interrupt processing prohibiting means for prohibiting all interrupt processing during initialization of the storage area of the main data storage means by the initialization means.
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 6. Comprising all data calculation means for calculating data of all storage areas including the unused area and / or the unused stack area in the main data storage means by a predetermined calculation method;
The interruption-time interruption process execution means calculates adjustment data for setting a calculation result by the all-data calculation means to a specific value in the interruption process, and stores the calculated adjustment data in the main data storage Execute the process to be stored in the means,
The main control state return processing means determines whether the calculation result by the all data calculation means is the specific value when the main control means is activated, and the calculation result by the all data calculation means is the specific value. The main control state return process is executed on the condition that it is determined that there is
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 7. The microcomputer constituting the main control means can generate a plurality of types of interrupts,
The main control means includes an unused interrupt process execution means for executing an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the process before the interrupt when an unused interrupt occurs among the plurality of types of interrupts. Including,
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 8. The main control means includes
Is it allowed to generate a plurality of predetermined types of winnings including a small prize winning with a game ball and a special winning with a transition of a gaming state before the display result of the variable display device is derived? A pre-determining means for determining whether or not,
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, a range of determination values that will determine that the pre-determining means allows the generation of the numerical data for determination input in the determination area is determined. Range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data;
Including
The range specifying data storage means includes, as the range specifying data, overlapping range specifying data that can specify a range of determination values that are determined to allow the occurrence of both the special prize and the small prize winning simultaneously. Remember,
The pre-determining unit determines whether or not the winning is determined depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the range specifying data storage unit. Including an allowance determining means for determining whether or not the occurrence of a prize is permitted, and determining that the winning determined to be permitted by the allowance determining means is permitted.
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9. The main control means includes
Is it allowed to generate a plurality of predetermined types of winnings including a small prize winning with a game ball and a special winning with a transition of a gaming state before the display result of the variable display device is derived? A pre-determining means for determining whether or not,
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
With respect to the small role winning, it is determined so that a range of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow the generation of numerical data for determination input in the determination area can be specified. Small range winning range specifying data storage means for storing the specified range specifying data;
The special prize is determined so that a range of determination values that can be determined to be allowed to be generated by the pre-determining means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area can be specified. Special winning range specifying data storage means for storing range specifying data;
Including
A determination value range that will determine that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the special prize is a determination that determines that the advance determination means allows the occurrence of the small prize winning. Including a range of decision values that overlaps the range of values,
The pre-determining means includes
Depending on whether or not the determination value range input by the determination area is included in the range of the determination value specified by the range specifying data stored in the small role winning range specifying data storage means, A small role winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence is permitted,
Does the range of determination values specified by the range specifying data stored in the special winning range specifying data storage means include the same numerical value data for determination as that used by the small prize winning allowance determining means for determination? A special winning allowance judging means for judging whether or not the occurrence of the special winning is permitted depending on whether or not,
Including
The pre-determining means is
A determination is made as to whether or not the occurrence of a winning is permitted by both the small role winning permission determining means and the special winning permission determining means,
When it is determined that both the small role winning allowance determining means and the special winning allowance determining means indicate that the occurrence of a winning is permitted, it is determined that the occurrence of both the small winning a prize and the special winning is permitted. To
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 9. The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
A permissible stage setting means for selecting and setting one of the permissible stages from a plurality of permissible stages having different ratios for determining that the pre-determining means allows the generation of a prize;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
The determination value data indicating the number of determination values that the pre-determining means determines to allow for the generation of the determination numerical data input to the determination area for any of the winning areas, the plurality of determination value data The pre-determining means for the numerical value data for determination input to the determination area for a winning that is stored in common for the allowable level of the type and for which the determination value data is not stored in common for the allowable level. Determination value data storage means for individually storing the determination value data indicating the number of determination values to be determined to allow the occurrence according to the type of the allowable stage;
Including
The pre-determining means is the determination numerical data input to the determination area in accordance with the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means corresponding to the allowable stage set by the allowable stage setting means. Including an allowance determining unit that determines whether or not the occurrence of the winning is permitted, and accepting the occurrence of the winning that is determined to be permitted by the allowance determining unit. decide,
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 11. The judgment value data storage means stores different number judgment value data indicating the number of different judgment values as judgment value data to be individually stored according to the type of the allowable stage, and individually according to the type of the allowable stage. The same number determination value data indicating the number of the same determination values as the determination value data is stored in accordance with the type of winning.
The slot machine using the game ball according to claim 12. The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermination means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area is stored. Judgment value data storage means;
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination unit,
The slot machine using the game ball is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
Input means for inputting n-bit array data signals output from the latch circuit as n-bit numeric data without changing the bit array order in a specific area different from the determination area;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means replaces the specific bit data of the n-bit numerical data input to the specific area with the other bits of the numerical data, and performs the replacement n The bit replacement numerical data is input to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
A slot machine using a game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 13. The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermination means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area is stored. Judgment value data storage means;
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination unit,
The slot machine using the game ball is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
An input means for inputting an n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit to the specific area different from the determination area as n-bit first numerical data without changing the bit array order;
Numerical value updating means for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting second numerical data updated by the numerical value update means when the predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical data extracted by the numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k) is used. Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs the operation result numerical data composed of the upper k bits and the lower j bits after the operation by the operation means to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
The slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 14. The main control means includes
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of predetermined types of winnings to be generated before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Numerical data input means for inputting numerical data updated within a predetermined range at a predetermined timing into the determination area as determination numerical data for each game before making the determination by the prior determination means;
For the plurality of types of winnings, determination value data indicating the number of determination values that are determined to be allowed to be generated by the predetermination means for the determination numerical data input to the determination area is stored. Judgment value data storage means;
Including
Whether or not the pre-determining means indicates that the determination numerical data input to the determination area allows the occurrence of the winning according to the determination value data stored in the determination value data storage means And determining whether to allow the generation of a prize determined to indicate that the generation is permitted by the permission determination unit,
The slot machine using the game ball is
A pulse generation circuit for generating a pulse signal of a predetermined frequency;
An n-bit (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) array data signal is inverted alternately between the first level and the second level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit, and Each time the level of the (m-1) th bit (m is an integer of 2 or more: m ≦ n) from the lower level is inverted from the first level to the second level, the level of the mth bit from the lower level is changed to the first level. A counter circuit that inverts and outputs alternately at two levels;
When a predetermined extraction condition resulting from the player's operation is satisfied, the n-bit array data signal output from the counter circuit is latched, and the bit order of the latched n-bit array data signal is changed. Latch circuit that outputs without
An input means for inputting an n-bit array data signal output from the latch circuit to the specific area different from the determination area as n-bit first numerical data without changing the bit array order;
First numerical value updating means for updating the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
Second numerical value updating means for updating third numerical data different from the second numerical data at a predetermined timing;
First numerical value extracting means for extracting second numerical data from the first numerical value updating means by satisfying a predetermined extraction condition;
Second numerical value extraction means for extracting third numerical data from the second numerical value update means when a predetermined extraction condition is satisfied;
The second numerical value extracted by the first numerical value extraction means for the upper k bits in the first numerical data of the upper k bits (k is a natural number: k <n) and the lower j bits (j = n−k). Calculating means for performing a predetermined calculation using data and performing a predetermined calculation using the third numerical data extracted by the second numerical value extracting means for the lower j bits;
Further comprising
The numerical data input means inputs arithmetic result numerical data consisting of upper k bits after the operation by the arithmetic means and lower j bits after the operation to the determination area as the determination numerical data.
The slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 15. The control information transmitting means prohibits transmission of new control information until a predetermined transmission regulation time elapses after transmission of the control information;
The slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 16. The power interruption detection means includes monitoring voltage generation means for generating a monitoring voltage to be monitored as the predetermined power state,
The power interruption detection means monitors the monitoring voltage, and outputs the power interruption signal when the monitoring voltage becomes a predetermined value or less,
The slot machine using the game ball further includes power supply voltage generation means for generating a power supply voltage supplied to an electrical component mounted on the slot machine using the game ball separately from the monitoring voltage.
The slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 17. The slot machine using the game ball has at least an interval of a timer interrupt process for executing a process in which the control information transmitting unit transmits the control information from the time when the power interruption signal is output by the power interruption detecting unit. Sub-drive power supply maintaining means for maintaining a minimum power supply required to drive the sub-control means over a period of time,
The slot machine using the game ball according to any one of claims 1 to 18.

Images